fTY OF ALBANY 
 
 SYLLABUS AND OUTLINES 
 
 OF 
 
 PHYSICAL TRAINING 
 
 FOR 
 
 PUBLIC SCHOOLS 
 
 914 
 
ALBANY 
 
 PUBLIC SCHOOLS 
 
 Syllabus of 
 
 PHYSICAL TRAINING 
 
 Arranged by 
 LAURENCE S. HILL 
 
 Physical Director, Albany Public Schools 
 
 Copyright applied for. 
 
^v 
 
 Board cf Education 
 
 Jacob H. Herzog, President 
 
 William J. Armstrong 
 
 William S.Dyer 
 
 Superintendent of Schools 
 
 C. Edward Jones 
 
 s^SEP 181^14 
 
 'C1.A380410 
 
"^ TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 f 
 
 Page 
 
 Introduction , . . 4 
 
 Instructions to the Teachers 5 
 
 Posture and the Posture Drill 7 
 
 Principal Starting Positions of the Arms 11 
 
 Principal Starting Positions of the Feet and Legs 11 
 
 Movements of the Head 12 
 
 Movements of the Trunk 13 
 
 Movements of the Arms.* 15 
 
 Movements of the Legs 15 
 
 Facings 18 
 
 Class-Room Tactics 18 
 
 Rhythmical Steps 21 
 
 Graded List of Folk and Aesthetic Dances 25 
 
 Explanation of Technical Terms 27 
 
 Gymnastic Days' Order and Progression .^ 49 
 
 Breathing Exercises 49 
 
 Routine for Beginning and Closing the Lesson 49 
 
 Rising Exercise, Grades 1, 2 and 3. 49 
 
 Rising Exercise, Grades 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. 50 
 
 Value of Play. , 50 
 
 Games 50 
 
 Play Exercises and School-Room Games 50 
 
 Imaginary Plays 51 
 
 Out-of-Door Games 53 
 
 Gymnastic Action Story : A Gilliwee Picnic 63 
 
 Grade I 65 
 
 Grade II 69 
 
 Grade III 7Z 
 
 Grade IV 78 
 
 Grade V 83 
 
 Grade VI 88 
 
 Grade VII 93 
 
 Grade VIII 98 
 
 Course of Physical Training for High School Girls 103 
 
 Course of Physical Training for High School Boys 122 
 
 Supplementary 123 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The lessons in gymnastics have been arranged to serve' as a guide for the 
 class teacher. The exercises are especially adapted to meet the physical needs 
 of the pupils and grade. 
 
 If properly executed they will give' the pupils sufficient vigorous muscular 
 work with as little mental strain as possible. 
 
 Since so much depends on the manner in which a gymnastic lesson is given, 
 it is the duty of the teacher to become thoroughly familiar with every phase of 
 the work, so that the greatest possible good may result to the pupils under her 
 care. Arousal and sustainment of interest are of prime importance. 
 
 In order that such exercises may accomplish their purpose it is necessary 
 that much attention, be given to the manner and order of execution. An 
 exercise may be executed with all the force at a pupil's command, yet may 
 fail to reap the intended benefit, because of a wrong standing position or a 
 yielding of certain parts of the body which should be held rigid. 
 
 The teachers must have their pupils understand the importance' of a correct 
 attitude and of accurate movements and must insist upon these points at all 
 times. 
 
 Physical training develops graceful movements and the ability to do things 
 with a minimum of energy. 
 
 Through prompt response to well-given comrhands, the pupil acquires the 
 habit of obedience, and consequently discipline is much easier. 
 
 In doing without hesitation what the commands call for, the pupil quickens 
 his perceptive faculties and thereby acquires the power to form rapid conclu- 
 sions and to act upon them promptly. 
 
 Such movements do not merely promote muscular development ; they also 
 increase the activity of the respiratory, circulatory and digestive organs, as well 
 as the nervous system. By strengthening the intellect and will, physical train- 
 ing develops the moral self-control which is the best safeguard against the 
 pernicious habits so often formed in the period of adolescence. 
 
 We advocate a system which will produce a harmonious development, a 
 perfect equilibrium of all the parts of the body ; have a healthy and strengthen- 
 ing effect on the nervous system, with rest and relief to the worried and over- 
 taxed brain. 
 
INSTRUCTIONS TO THE TEACHERS. 
 
 I. Time: 
 
 The minimum time to be given to physical training is 14 minutes a day. 
 A certain time should be set apart in the daily program, and the exercises 
 should be given as regularly as any other part of the school work. 
 
 II. Ventilation and TtMPERATURE: 
 
 Ventilate the rooms thoroughly before beginning the lesson, be sure that 
 the air in the roomi is pure, or becomes so before the lesson is far advanced. 
 Open the windows from the top and bottom, exercise vigorously during the time 
 the windows are open. 
 
 During exercises the temperature should not register above 70 nor below 
 65 degrees. 
 
 Insist upon the pupils removing overcoats, overshoes, cloaks and wraps of 
 all kinds. Impress upon them the evil effects of wearing such things indoors, 
 also the wearing of tight-fitting garments of all kinds. The movements should 
 be as free as possible. 
 
 III. Perfect Stillness of Person : 
 
 If the exercise demands but one member of the body to act, pupils should 
 be taught not to move members of the body not affected by the command. 
 
 IV. Uniformity of Motion : 
 
 When exercising, the entire class should appear as a unit, moving at the 
 exact second ; tardy, indifferent, careless and neghgent pupils thereby acquire 
 habits of exactness, precision and instant obedience. 
 
 Use drastic means to attain uniformity of motion. 
 
 V. Manner of Execution : 
 
 To gain the desired results, all gymnastic movements must be executed 
 vigorously and in good form. Teaching gymnastics without paying attention 
 to accuracy, correct direction, position and form is a failure. Accuracy of 
 movements, for the purpose of securing co-ordination and full mental control 
 over our muscles and movements, is of more importance than anything else in 
 Physical Training. The execution of any exercise simply for its own sake is, 
 therefore, wrong; the way it is performed is the prime object and of the greatest 
 benefit to the pupil. We must, therefore, pay attention to form and accuracy 
 from the outset. Corrections may become necessary, but these must not take 
 too long, for it is impossible to secure exactness and accuracy of form at once. 
 
 As to rhythm, it will be found that arm movements may generally be 
 executed briskly, while leg movements demand more time. Movements of the 
 head and trunk should be executed slowly. 
 
 Let the exercises follow each other as quickly as possible. 
 
 Demonstrate all new exercises before the class. Repeat each new lesson 
 a few times with the class after which the command should be sufficient 
 
 Remember that to show the exercise once is fcetter than several explanations. 
 
 Insist on a proper standing position " at all times," also on correct 
 movements. 
 
 When an exercise is to be executed in rhythmic succession (as for 
 instances some marching exercises), give the command: "in-time — begin!" 
 and immediately begin the count : '' 1-2, etc.'' When the exercise is to cease, 
 give the command : " class halt ! " instead of the last count ; as " 1-2-3-4, 1-2 
 " CLASS HALT !" If pupils are marching give the command " halt !" when the 
 right foot is placed on the floor. They should then take one more step with 
 the left foot and close with the right. 
 
 When an exercice requires a standing position give the command for that 
 before giving the command for any part of the exercise. If the starting 
 position is fatiguing, and if there are several exercises which require the same 
 position, give, the command to resume the fundamental position after each 
 exercise, in order that the affected muscles may be momentarily relieved from 
 
the strain. As it is impossible to see all the movements of all the pupils from 
 the same place, the teacher should move about, to different parts of the room; 
 a side or rear view of the class will often reveal errors that are not visible 
 from the front. 
 
 Do NOT REQUIRE THE PUPILS TO MEMORIZE THE LESSONS. The LESSONS ARE 
 PROGRESSIVE AND THE DEGREE OF PERFECTION ATTAINED IN THE EXECUTION OF ONE 
 LESSION WILL DETERMINE THE EASE OR DIFFICULTY WITH WHICH THE NEW LESSON 
 MAY BE MASTERED. 
 
 VI. Commands : 
 
 The proper giving of commands is of the utmost importance. Upon the 
 ability to give commands depends largely the success or failure of the teacher. 
 The motor activities as well as the inhibitory powers are developed by the 
 prompt response to well-given commands, while the tone of voice and the 
 emphasis determine largely the amount of vigor and energy the pupils put into 
 their work. Therefore, every teacher should make it a duty to study carefully 
 the commands and to acquire the habit of giving them correctly. Every teacher 
 ought to memorize the exercises before conducting them, otherwise time is 
 wasted and the lesson becomes tiresome to the pupils. 
 
 There are two kinds of commands, the explanatory and the executive 
 or there is the order and command, as you like. The first part, in which the 
 class is informed of what it is to do, should be as precise as consistent with 
 clearness, and should convey clearly the idea of the motion or motions to be 
 executed; as ''arms forward" is the first part of the command, or the order. 
 However, to complete the command the second, or executive, part is necessary, 
 in order that the pupils may know when to raise the arms. For this part of the 
 command the verb which indicated the movement is generally used, although 
 in marching exercises having a succession of movements a number may be 
 used instead, in which case use " in-time — begin ! 1-2-etc." 
 
 The explanatory command tells the pupils what movements are to be 
 executed. A slight pause follows this, giving the pupils time to fully under- 
 stand what they are to do. No movement must be allowed during this pause. 
 
 The executive command now follows distinctly calling for instant vigorous 
 
 ACTION. 
 
 All new exercises must be demonstrated before the class to command, in 
 order that the pupils may fix the movement in their minds. The command .for 
 each part of the exercise should be given separately; as "arms-forward — 
 
 raise ! " " downward — SINK " or " POSITION ! " 
 
 In specifying direction, movement or part of the body, the teacher should 
 always use the exact term; as forward, upward, raise, straighten, stretch, left 
 leg, right knee, etc., so that the pupils will not be in doubt as to the meaning 
 of the command. 
 
 Be sure and bring in all commands that are necessary in the activities of the 
 pupils while in school. Correlate physical training with all other work. 
 
 Only the commands outlined in this manual must be used. 
 
 VII. Thoroughness : 
 
 /. e., the teacher should be familiar with her lesson before the gymnastic 
 period, so that she will not feel compelled to consult the book for every com- 
 mand. The latter is a grave mistake, as it not only causes the loss of valuable 
 time, but also lowers the pupil's confidence in the teacher's knowledge and 
 ability. The teacher being able to instruct at the proper time without the 
 constant aid of a manual, will also feel herself more free and independent, and 
 will be' ready to arouse interest and enthusiasm in the pupil. 
 
 VIII. Music: 
 
 When a musical instrument is available it may be used, so long as the 
 pupils exercise with that vim and vigor that characterize efficient work. The 
 movements should never be allowed TO become mechanical. Use music in 
 the marching exercises. 
 
IX. Positions : 
 
 The position for exercising should always be an erect one. The heels 
 and knees should be close together ; the toes turned outward to an angle of 90 
 degrees ; the body, erect and well balanced upon the hips, should be inclined 
 slightly forward so as to throw the weight little more upon the balls of the 
 feet than upon the heels ; the chest well up ; the shoulders level and well back ; 
 head erect, eyes forward and chin in, arms at the sides with fingers touching 
 the thigh. This is the fundamental position. Command: "position!" (See 
 Fig. 1, page 7. 
 
 A large number of exercises are executed from the " Fundamental Position ;" 
 for others there are certain " Starting Positions " of arms and legs. 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 Fundamental position, 
 attitude. 
 
 A perfectly erect 
 
 X. POSTURE AND THE POSTURE DRILL. 
 
 The real work for posture by the teachers, — the corrective teaching through 
 which alone those pupils deficient in posture may receive the development they 
 need, — lies in two distinct lines : 
 
 1. Training the muscular sense whereby the child knows whether or not 
 he is in the correct position and is able to assume it voluntarily, and 
 
 2. Strengthening by exercise those muscles in which weakness allows 
 lapsing into poor posture. 
 
Posture 
 Drill. 
 
 For those children who have the voluntary muscular power for assuming 
 correct posture, the best method for getting them into correct standing position 
 is the class exercise or posture drill: "Arms-sideward — raise! Chest over 
 toes— sway! Chins-in ! Arms-sink," or, " Arms-sideward— raise ! Balance! 
 Keeping chest over toes— Arms— sink ! " (Keep the weight over the balls of 
 the feet.) 
 
 Pupils should understand exactly what they are expected to do, and 
 phrases that more exactly describe what you want may be found useful. "Chest 
 over toes " is one of the best, after children know what you mean. 
 
 Fig 2 — Pos+ure Drill. Class correction for 
 good attitude. Stretching the arms side- 
 ward and swaying forward from the 
 ankles to get in good position. 
 
 For those children who have not the voluntary power for assuming correct 
 posture, the teacher must give indiv'dual correction. It is necessary that this 
 class of children be placed in the correct position by someone else until they 
 have acquired the voluntary power to do so themselves. {See Posture Outline.) 
 
 Having assisted each pupil in your class to assume the correct standing 
 position, and it will be necessary to assist the same individual time and time 
 again, the next point of importance is to train the power to take this position 
 independently. For this, pupils must learn to discriminate by their own 
 
muscular sense between the feeling of the correct position and their habitual 
 poor posture. For this, use the posture drill spoken of before. Explain to the 
 children that Position! and Attention! when standing means, "chest over toes!" 
 position, an easy balanced position. Then let the pupils relax — " In place-rest ! " 
 After a brief rest give the command. Position ! and immediately they should 
 assume the new (good) attitude. Give this drill three or four times in suc- 
 cession, inspecting the lines each time and assisting those pupils into position 
 who have not yet acquired the full sense or power to assume it independently. 
 Give this drill on losing and taking good position at the beginning of each 
 lesson and between ex'crcises, when pupils are seen to be losing correct form 
 in the execution of movements. Do not, however, fatigue the children by 
 making too long a correction while in a certain position. 
 
 Remember, that a pupil who has acquired the power voluntarily to assume 
 correct position, or even to hold it for a time, has by no means achieved it as 
 a permanent characteristic. The very fact that he or she has had habitually 
 poor posture indicates weakness in important muscles, and an habitually faulty 
 co-ordination between the different groups of muscles. For instance, where 
 the shoulders habitually droop forward, muscles on the back that should pull 
 the shoulder blades backward are weak. Nothing can perm-inently overcome 
 this fault of posture but exercise that will contract so definitely and repeatedly 
 those particular muscles that their tone and elasticity will be improved, and 
 they will become permanently shortened while the exercises of the will, such as 
 used in the posture drill, ma}^ accomplish this same end for a few moments, 
 the position is held at the expense of a greater nervous stimulus than is 
 needed by a healthy muscle, instead of being done by the contrictHe nower of 
 the muscular fibres themselves. These weak muscles can be cultivated only by 
 exercise^ which offers the only permanent cure for such a condition. 
 
 This applies to every fault of posture from head to foot. Drooping head, 
 faulty spine positions, etc. It, therefore, becomes of the greatest importance 
 that every course of study in gymnastic exercises for schools should contain 
 a large percentage of corrective exercises. 
 
 Equally important with the cultivation of strength in weak muscles is the 
 establishment of correct habits of co-ordination in the various muscle groups. 
 To illustrate briefly, in the habitual fatigue position, the muscles on the front 
 of the body are too much contracted, and those on the back too much relaxed. 
 So habitual has this relation become, that it feels to be right, and in anything 
 the individual does, the faulty relation between these groups will be maintained, 
 whether he walk, or dance, play games, or be otherwise active, his bad posture 
 will always be present. To overcome this, new habits of co-ordination must 
 be established ; the muscle groups must be habituated to working together with 
 a different proportion in their pull and effort. The gymnastic exercises must be 
 taken in response to such commands that each movement has conscious definite 
 direction of its muscular co-ordination, and is finished to a full terminal position. 
 
 If corrective results are to be obtained, the teacher must observe her pupils 
 throughout a lesson in gymnastics to see that they hold the correct lines of 
 posture. The grouping of the children for posture here proves of especial 
 value, for it admits of group teaching. For instance, divide the pupils into two 
 groups, I and II. Those who can assume and hold correct posture indefinitely 
 put in Group I. Those who cannot and who need special attention put in 
 Group II, and march Group II nearest the windows where the light is best. 
 While the entire class exercise in response to your commands, concentrate your 
 attention upon Group II, which is having the greater difficulty to maintain its 
 posture, and assist, personally, those who yield to the old muscle habits. Pride 
 and ambition of the pupil should be aroused for promotion to Group I. 
 
 The execution of corrective exercises so they do correct is the object of all 
 gymnastic work for posture. It is the only means of developing weak muscles 
 and changing faulty co-ordination. It is the test of a teacher's teaching ability 
 whether she merely gives commands or uses each exercise for accomplishing 
 some definite purpose with each pupil. 
 
 Pupils should always know the purpose of each exercise, and work con- 
 sciously and definitely for the desired result. If the exercise is intended to draw 
 
10 
 
 the shoulder blades together on the back, the pupils should know that fact, and 
 should feel the exercise at the place indicated. 
 
 The vertical line test is a practical means of determining the posture of an 
 individual. To assist the eye in determining whether the long axis of the trunk 
 
 of the body and the long axis of the neck and head taken together are vertical 
 lines, a line or pole may be dropped from the front of the ear to the forward 
 part of the foot. It will be seen to parallel the axes of the large segments of 
 the body. (See Figs. 3 and 4.) 
 
. a o 
 
 be 3 o 
 
 
 
 ? y - ■% 
 
 
 ' I y:) ' 
 
 &^'i 
 
 \ J 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 \ i 
 
 1 ( 
 
 ^,*-'-^iir#^^^%^' ■ ■ 
 
 il 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ ' a^H 
 
 :^^.-0 ^%^ 
 
 ■',.>^-' 
 
 ^ -<5^Jj 
 
 . ■ ;^^^^H^ 
 
 r 
 
 1"^ 
 
 • ■ ' .■^ 
 
 
 fi^^.,.-^ 
 
 ; 1 
 
 
 
 i .^ 
 
 -d o 
 
 
 r- rt 
 
 So 5f '^ o "S 
 
zigzag 
 (This slouching po; 
 by carrying .thi 
 pockets.) 
 
 of " fatigue " position. 
 
 The "bantam" position: Over cor 
 rected or exaggerated posture. 
 
 Fig. 8. Hands placed to get the pupil 
 relax the distended ribs — Individual corn 
 tion of " bantam " position. 
 
Postrue Drill; 
 
 (b) Corresponding curve in lumbar region. 
 2. Bantam Position, exaggerated type: (See Fig. 6, back of folder.) 
 (,a) Chest too prominent. Exaggerated outward curve of front 
 
 g the Muscular Sense 
 (See Fig. 1, page 7.) 
 
 Fatigue Position: (See Fig. 7, back of folder.) 
 
 (a) Individual in profile. 
 
 (b) Hand or book on waist line in front. Hand on back over 
 
 shoulder blades— push upper part of body forward. 
 
 (c) Head: Chin-in! Hand on head— and hand on chin. 
 
 ((/> Shoulder: Ear test. Shoulder blades should be flat oniback. 
 force shoulders back. ' 
 
 him understand 1 
 
 I'oor Posture: 
 
 1. Fatigue position. 
 
 2. Bantam position. 
 
 3. Round, or straigh 
 
 4. Curvature. 
 
 (See Figs. 5, 6, 7 and 8. 1 
 
 "^ 
 
 alJo'w the 
 
 standing 
 i experiencing, although 
 
 2. Bantam Position; (See Fig. 8, bad 
 (a) Individual in profile, 
 (ft) Place hands on the distended : 
 
 preliminary to any exercise, especii 
 
 ngly 
 and ask child to " Relax " 
 
 includes somt 
 ng the position 
 
 eld throughout the execu- 
 
 nding position should be 
 
 s. Too much stress cannot be laid upon this 
 as a preliminary. Without it, corrective exer- 
 
 ot the best corrective exercises for special 
 
 f the shoulder blades: 
 
 ulder— circling! l-2-;j-l. (The circle should be 
 
 ^or correcting position of spine: 
 Hips— tirm! Head or neck— firm! Trunk-forward— bend! Raise! 
 torwaia and upward and heeis — raise! Stretch up as high as pu; 
 
 6. For balance: 
 
 Deep knee— bend! Leg— raising! 
 
 7. Respiratory muscles: 
 
 Deep breathing, forced inhalatic 
 
11 
 
 PRINCIPAL STARTING POSITIONS OF THE ARMS. 
 
 Position and Command. 
 
 1. Hips — Firm ! Position ! 
 
 2. Neck — Firm ! Position ! 
 
 3. Arms-upward — Bend ! 
 Position ! 
 
 4. Arms-forward — Bend ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 5. Arms-sideward — Bend ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Arms-half forward — Bend ! 
 Position ! 
 
 7. Arms-half sideward — 
 
 Bend ! Position ! 
 
 8. Arms-sideward — Raise ! 
 
 Arms — Sink ! 
 
 9. Arms-forward — Raise ! 
 Arms — Sink ! . 
 
 10. Arms-upward — Raise ! 
 Arms — Sink ! 
 
 (See Figs. 12 and 13, 
 page 16.) 
 
 Explanation. 
 The hands rest upon the hips, fingers to the 
 f.-ont, thumbs backward, elbows straight to the 
 side, and shoulders back. 
 
 The hands are placed on the neck, fingers 
 meeting behind; the shoulders and elbows 
 drawn well back ; the chest expanded, and the 
 head remaining erect. The muscles of the arm, 
 neck and shoulders should feel contracted. 
 
 The forearms are bent in the elbow joint as 
 far as possible up to the upper arm and rotated 
 outward; the semi-flexed fingers pointing 
 toward the shoulders ; the upper arms close to 
 the body. 
 
 The forearms are placed horizontally in front 
 of the chest, finger tips touching, knuckles up- 
 ward, upper arms sideward shoulder high. 
 
 The arms are raised sideward tips of fingers 
 pointing toward the neck, thumbs touching the 
 shoulders. The elbows to be level with and in 
 the same plane as the shoulders. 
 
 The upper arms are raised horizontally side- 
 ward, with the fprearms bent to a right angle 
 in the elbow joints; hands, fingers, wrists and 
 forearms in one line straight 1 forward, and in 
 height with the upper arms and shoulders ; 
 palms turned toward each other ; shoulders well 
 back. 
 
 Same as No. 6, except hands, fingers, wrists 
 ' and forearms in one straight line upward. 
 
 The arms are raised horizontally sideways 
 and kept in a straight line from shoulder to tips 
 of fingers ; shoulders well back ; palms of hands 
 down. In lowering the arms no noise whatever 
 should be noticed. 
 
 The arms are raised horizontally forward and 
 kept in a straight line from shoulder to tips 
 of fingers, parallel with each other ; palms of 
 the hands turned toward each other. 
 
 The arms are in a perpendicular position — in 
 straight line from shoulders to tips of fingers, 
 above the head ; the shoulders and arms drawn 
 well back to the ears and parallel with each 
 other ; palms of the hands turned toward each 
 other. The head must be kept erect and trunk 
 and legs straight. 
 
 When the arms are in Position ! at the sides, 
 the direction in which they are to be raised 
 should be given, /. e., forward-upward, or side- 
 ward-upward — raise. 
 
 PRINCIPAL STARTING POSITIONS OF THE FEET AND LEGS. 
 
 Position and Command. Explanation. 
 
 1. Feet — Close! 'Feet — Open! The feet are no longer in 90- degrees toward 
 
 each other, but parallel and close to each other. 
 
12 
 
 2. Feet-sideward — Place ! 
 
 Feet-together^ — Place ! or 
 Position ! 
 
 3. Left (or Rt.) foot-forward 
 
 Place! Left or (Rt.) 
 foot — Replace ! 
 
 4. Left (or Rt.) foot-outward 
 
 Place! Left (or Rt.) 
 foot — Replace ! 
 
 5. Left (or Rt.)-outward— 
 
 Fall Out! Position! 
 
 6. Left (or Rt.) -forward- 
 
 Fall Out! Position. 
 
 7. Left (or Rt.) -sideward — 
 
 Fall Out! Position! 
 
 8. Left (or Rt.) -backward- 
 
 Fall Out! Position! 
 
 9. Left (or Rt.) -outward- 
 
 backward — ^F a 1 1 Out ! 
 Position ! 
 
 10. Sit on Desk— Place! 
 Position ! 
 
 11. Number twos ready to- 
 Support ! Position ! 
 
 The feet are braced apart with a distance of 
 two feet's length between the heels. It is done 
 in two counts. On one the left foot is placed 
 one foot's distance straight to the side, on two 
 the right foot is placed one foot's distance 
 straight to the right side. 
 
 One foot is placed straight forward with a 
 distance of two feet between the heels. The 
 weight should be evenly distributed over both 
 feet. 
 
 One foot is placed obliquely forward, with a 
 distance of two feet between the heels. The 
 weight should be evenly distributed over both 
 feet. 
 
 One foot is placed obhquely forward, with 
 a distance of three feet between the heels. The 
 front knee is bent to a right angle and kept well 
 out over the toes; the body at once thrown over 
 the front knee so as to make a straight line 
 with the back and backward leg, which is kept 
 straight. The chest well forward and square to 
 the front without twisting the body. 
 
 The same as No. 5, but straight forward. 
 
 Straight sideward. ■ 
 Straight backward. 
 Obliquely backward. 
 
 Pupils face right or left and sit on or lean 
 against the edge of desk, with the feet Hat on 
 the floor. This holds the hips firm for trunk 
 twisting and bending. 
 
 After having numbered off by twos the com- 
 mand " Number twos ready to-Support ! " is 
 given. Number twos raise arms forward ready 
 to grasp the elbows of number one (who has 
 " neck firm ") and places left foot forward, 
 ready to support number one from falling. 
 
 By facing right about number one can be 
 commanded to be ready to support. 
 
 MOVEMENTS OF THE HEAD. 
 
 Position and Command. 
 
 1. Head-forward — Bend ! 
 
 Raise ! 
 
 2. Head-backward — Bend ! 
 
 Raise ! 
 
 3. Head to left (or Rt.) — 
 
 Bend ! Raise ! 
 
 4. Head to left (or Rt.) — 
 
 Twist ! F o r w a r d — 
 
 Twist ! 
 
 5. Head — ^Circling ! Begin ! 
 
 Halt! 
 
 Explanation. 
 
 Bend the head forward until the chin rests on 
 the chest. 
 
 Bend the head back as far as possible with- 
 out stretching the neck. 
 
 Bend the head towards and as near as possi- 
 ble to the corresponding shoulder. 
 
 The head, perfectly erect, is turned in the 
 ■direction indicated as far as possible. 
 
 The head is moved slowly around in a circle 
 with an even movement, without twisting or 
 jerking; first to the left side, then as many 
 
33 
 
 Head— Rotation ! Left ! for- 
 ward ! Right ! forward ! 
 or 1-2-3-4. 
 
 times to the other side. The whole body must 
 be kept steady. This is especially good for the 
 circulation. 
 
 Same as head twisting. 
 
 
 
 ^^^K^^^H^^H 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^B 
 
 
 ■PW; . |HI| 
 
 1 ..^^^1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 MOVEMENTS OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 Position and Command. 
 Trunk-forward — Bend ! 
 Raise ! 
 Figs. 9 and 10.) 
 
 I 
 
 H 
 I 
 
 ON 
 
 bib 
 
 Explanation. 
 The trunk is flexed forward in the hips. The 
 shoulders and head should be kept well back 
 and the chest well forward. It should be done 
 slowly. 
 
14 
 
 2. Trunk-backward — Bend ! 
 Raise ! 
 (Fig. 11.) 
 
 This is done by flexing the trunk backward, 
 making an even curve of the whole spine from 
 the neck to the small of the back. The head 
 must not be kept forward nor be bent to a 
 strained position backward; it shall follow the 
 movement in line with the curved spine. The 
 knees must not be bent. It should be done 
 slowly. 
 
 Fig. 11.^— Arch movement; Trunk-backward — bend! 
 Notice : The bending is too pronounced from the 
 waist. The bending should be in the dorsal 
 region. 
 
 3. Trunk-to left (or Rt.) — The trunk is flexed to the side, curving the 
 Bend! Raise! whole spine without twisting; head following 
 
 the movement, without pushing up the 
 shoulders ; legs straight. Done slowly. 
 
 Trunk-to left (or Rt.)— 
 Twist! Forward— Twist ! 
 
 The trunk is turned from above the waist as 
 far as possible to the side, without moving the 
 hips or changing the position of the legs, and 
 without bending. Head square to the chest; 
 shoulders well back; chest expanded. 
 
35 
 
 5. Trunk — Circling! 
 Halt! 
 
 This is done by moving the trunk slowly 
 around from the waist, describing as large a 
 circle as possible; first to the left side, then 
 as many times to the other side. The trunk 
 must not be twisted, but be square to the 
 front ; the chest well expanded ; the hips, shoul- 
 ders and head steady ; the legs straight. 
 
 MOVEMENTS OF TH£ ARMS. 
 
 Commands. 
 1. Arms-forward — Stretch ! 
 (Arms-forward, sideward, 
 upward, backward — 
 Stretch!) Position! 
 Arms-downward — Stretch 1 
 Arms — Sink I 
 (Figs. 12 and 13, page 16.) 
 
 Explanation. 
 Arms-forward, sideward, upward, backward 
 and downward stretch are always done on two 
 commands each. On " bend ! " or the first 
 command the arms are bent upward : Arms- 
 upward — Bend I On " stretch ! " or the second 
 command, the arms are extended quickly and 
 sharply in the direction commanded without 
 moving the body. 
 
 2. Arms-forward and" upward The arms are raised as quick as possible 
 
 — Fling ! Forward and straight forward and upward imtil they are 
 
 downward — Sink I perpendicularly on the shoulders. 
 (Figs. 12 and 13, page 16.) 
 
 3. Arms-sideward and up- The arms are raised as quick as possible 
 
 ward — Fling ! Sideward straight sideways and upward until they are 
 
 and downward — Sink! perpendicular on the shoulders. 
 
 4. Arms-sideward — Fling! The arms are thrown or flung quickly out 
 
 (From: Arms-forward sideward to Arms-sideward position without 
 
 Bend!) moving the upper arms. 
 Arms- — Bend ! 
 
 5. Arms-sideward — Fling! 
 Arms — Sink ! 
 
 6. Arm — Circling! Begin! 
 Halt! 
 
 7. Arm — Rotation ! Begin ! 
 Halt! 
 
 The straight arms are thrown sideward to 
 Arms-sideward position, keeping the shoulders 
 well back, chest well forward and head up. 
 
 This is done by moving the arms around in 
 the shoulder joint, when in Arms-sideward 
 position. They should always be moved in a 
 circle upward, backward, downward and for- 
 ward, and not reverse. 
 
 This is done by turning the sideways raised 
 or half forward bent arms as far as possible in 
 both directions in the shoulder joint; the 
 shoulders and rest of the body steady. 
 
 MOVEMENTS OF THE LEGS. 
 
 Position and Command. 
 1. Heels— Raise! Sink. 
 
 2. Toes— Raise ! Sink ! 
 
 Explanation. 
 The heels are raised from the floor as high 
 as possible, keeping them together and without 
 bending the knees. 
 
 The toes are raised from the floor, body bal- 
 ancing on heels. 
 
16 
 
 3. Alternate-toes — Raise ! 
 Sink! 
 
 First the toes of one foot, then those of 
 the other. 
 
 
 ^^^^^^■^Pi ' ♦ ' 
 
 
 ^^^^K^L. ..^^' 
 
 
 ^^PI^Hp^9KjKi^^^B V , 
 
 HIiHil 
 
 ^^^H^^^^^H' >V^^ :''^*^J 
 
 fl^^lHHMl^^^^^^^^^^l 
 
 ^^^IHiHH ^' 1 
 
 
 «W%^ 1 
 
 
 
 
 ^ ■■••' '- 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 --i 
 
 4. Knees — Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 The knees may be bent to an obtuse, right, 
 or acute angle ; the body must remain erect. 
 The heels are raised, knees outward in the 
 
17 
 
 5. Touch-step-left forward — 
 Place ! Replace ! 
 Same sideward and back- 
 ward. 
 
 6. Left (or Rt.) leg-forward 
 
 — Raise ! Sink ! 
 Same sideward and back- 
 ward. 
 
 7. Left (or Rt.) knee-upward 
 
 —Bend! Sink! 
 
 8. Leg-forward or backward 
 Stretch ! Bend [ 
 
 9, Foot — Circling ! Begin ! 
 Halt ! 
 
 10. Leg — Rotation ! Begin ! 
 Halt ! 
 
 11. In place — Jump! Class — 
 Halt ! 
 
 12. Turning to left (or Rt.) — 
 
 in place — Jump I Class — ■ 
 •Halt! 
 
 13. From place — forward — 
 
 Jump ! Class — Halt ! 
 
 14. From place — ^backward — 
 
 Jump ! Class— Halt ! 
 
 15. One step-forward — Jump ! 
 
 Class— Halt ! 
 
 direction of the toes, the whole body rests on 
 the balls of the feet. 
 
 In these exercises the leg is raised in the 
 given direction, and by an extension of the 
 aijkle, the toe touches lightly on the floor, the 
 weight of the body rests on the stationary leg. 
 
 In the cross-touch-step forward and back- 
 ward the knee is bent. 
 
 The whole leg is lifted in the direction pre- 
 scribed, from the hip, with the knee straight 
 and toes pointed. A slow movement. 
 
 The thigh is' raised horizontally forward so 
 that it makes a right angle w^ith the hip ; the 
 leg hanging perpendicularly down, making a 
 right angle with the knee joint, the toes 
 pointed down. 
 
 This is done by extending the legs forward 
 or backward, as the case might be, after the 
 knee has been bent upward from': Knee-up- 
 wards — Bend ! 
 
 The foot is moved around in the ankle joint, 
 when the leg is raised up from the ground. 
 
 This is done by turning the forward-raised 
 leg inward and outward as far as possible in 
 the hip joint, without bending the knee or 
 ankle; the hips and rest of the bbdy steady. 
 
 It is done in six counts. On one, heels — 
 raise ; on two, knees — bend ; on three, the 
 knees and ankles are quickly stretched and the 
 whole body suddenly thrown straight upward 
 from the floor, with back straight, chest for- 
 ward and head well back; on four, the toes 
 and ball of feet touch the floor, the knees bend 
 to their former position and the body must 
 be well balanced without stooping forward 
 or backward, being careful to have raised heels 
 together; on five, knees — stretch; on six, heels 
 — sink. 
 
 Similar to In place — jump, but when in the 
 air the body is turned so as to face to the 
 left (or Rt.) in 90 degrees. 
 
 As In place — jump; but, on three, the body 
 is thrown forward! as well as up, so as to land 
 two or three feet in front of the former posi- 
 tion. The balance must be kept. 
 
 The same; but, on three, the body is thrown 
 backward instead of forward. It is very dif- 
 ficult to keep the balance. 
 
 This is done in five counts. On one, the 
 left (or Rt.) foot is placed forward; on two, 
 the backward leg swings quickly forward at 
 the same time the front foot pushes away 
 from the floor, and both feet are brought to- 
 gether before they, on three, touch the floor, 
 and land as in other jumping; on four, knees 
 — stretch ; on five, heels — sink. 
 
18 ; 
 
 16. Stride — Jump ! or Feet — On one, the feet are separated so that they 
 
 sideward place — Jump ! will land in stride position ; on two, the feet 
 Class — Halt! 1-2-3-4! are brought together with another jump. Re- 
 
 peat as often as practicable. 
 
 17. In place — Rest! Attention. Place left foot to the side and stand at ease. 
 
 FACINGS. 
 
 " Position and Command. Explanation. 
 
 1. Left — Face ! 1-2. Facing is executed by turning on the left 
 
 Front — Face! heel, tiie right foot being slightly raised and 
 
 aL'^o the toes of the left foot— on one; on two, 
 bring the right foot up to the left foot. 
 
 2. Right — Face! 1-2. Just The turn is one-fourth of a circle to the left 
 
 the reverse of Left-Face ! or right. 
 
 3. Half left (or Rt.) — Face! This is an eighth of a turn, executed in the 
 
 Front — Face ! same manner as above. 
 
 4. Left (or Rt.) -about — Face! This is one-half of a circle, executed as 
 
 Any of the facings. above. 
 
 CLASS-ROOM TACTICS. 
 
 Marching in some form should be a part of every gymnastic lesson. 
 Children should be taught to walk with a brisk, light and elastic step, which 
 of itself is conducive to good carriage of the body. This can be done without 
 noise or undue haste. The tendency to accelerate should be overcome by the 
 teacher keeping time by clapping hands or counting. The different directions 
 and variations in marching will be given in the lessons. 
 
 Preliminary Commands and Explanations: 
 
 (a) One step — forward — march! Take one step forward with the left 
 foot and close with the right in two counts. In taking any certain number of 
 steps forward, there is always one more count than the number of steps — 
 the extra count allowing the feet to come together. For instance : Three 
 steps forward — march! would take four counts, etc. After the required number 
 of steps are taken, the feet should come • together in the " Fundamental 
 Position." 
 
 (b) One step — left (cr right) sideward — march! Take one step to the 
 side and close with the opposite foot, in two counts. In taking a certain number 
 of steps sideward, there is always twice as many counts as there are steps; 
 the feet closing after each step. 
 
 ■ (c) Three steps — forward and four steps to the left {or left sideward) — 
 march! In executing commands given in series, make a complete execution of 
 each before taking up the next. In the execution of the above command, take 
 three steps forward and close feet four counts ; then without any pause, and in 
 even rhythm, take four steps to the left side — eight counts. 
 
 (d) In place — rest! Pb.cc left foot to the side and stand at ease. 
 
 Lesson 1. Mark fmr'—v^r'' ! Clu::: — Halt! 1-2. Marking time is march- 
 ing without gaining any ground. The feet are raised alternately forward and 
 immediately replaced; the knees are slightly bent while raising and the ankles 
 extended. There' should . be no undue swaying of the body. After the com- 
 mand: Class — halt! take one more step in place on count one; and on count 
 two bring the feet together. 
 
19 
 
 Lesson 2. (a) March forward and halt: Forward — march! Step firmly 
 forward with the left foot. Class — halt! 1-2. Take one more step forward 
 with the left foot and then place both heels together. 
 
 (b) March backward and halt: Backward — march! Step backward with 
 the left foot, but maintain the body pitched forward over the front foot. Class 
 — halt ! 1-2. One more step backward, and place heels together. 
 
 Lesson 3. March forward and backward: Forward — march! While the 
 children are marching forward, command, Backward — march ! The last word 
 should be given when the right foot is placed down, and on count one, the 
 left foot is placed forward; two, the right foot is sHghtly raised and placed 
 down again in the same place ; three, the left foot begins the marching back- 
 ward. Forward — march! sliould be given as the pupils" are marching back- 
 ward, the last word on the right foot, then on one, the left foot is placed back- 
 ward ; two, raise the right foot and place it down again ; three, the left foot 
 begins marching forward. I 
 
 Lesson 4. (a) Slow march: Forward — slow^march! From 40 to 50 
 steps in a minute ; the body must be carried well forward with the chest high 
 and good balance. 
 
 (b) Change from Normal to slow march: Forward- — march! Slow — 
 march! The last word when the left foot is placed down; take one more step 
 with the right foot in regular time, and then place the left foot forward with 
 accentuation and keep slow time. Normal — march! The command Ion the left 
 foot, take one more step in slow time, then begin with the left fooit in regular 
 time. 2 counts. 
 
 Lesson 5. (a) Left {right) about — Face! While the pupils are marching 
 forward give the command Face! on the left {right) foot; advance the right 
 (left) one; raise on tiptoes and turn about to the left (right) side, two ;^ step 
 forward with the right (left) foot, three; and continue marching. in the new 
 direction. Begin this drill in fairly slow time. 
 
 (b) Left {right) about — Halt! The same as the above, but on: count three 
 place the right (left) foot to the left (right) and stand, still. 
 
 ! 
 
 Lesson 6. Change from Forward to Backward March, and from Forward 
 March, to Left {right) about — Face! 
 
 Lesson 7. Left {right) about — face and forward — March! The children 
 turn Right About-Face in two quick counts and then begin marching with the 
 left foot accentuating the first step. 
 
 Lesson 8. (a) To the left Hank — Halt! While the pupils are marching 
 forward, give this command, and the last word (Halt) on the left foot; 
 advance the right foot and turn it a quarter circle to the left, one ; then place 
 the left foot to the right and stand still, two. Same as. Left — face — Halt ! 
 
 (b) To the right Hank — Halt! Give Halt on the right foot, advance the 
 left and turn it a quarter circle to the right, one; then place the right foot to 
 the left, two. 
 
 Lesson 9. Rght-face and forward — March! The pupils standing sideways 
 in the aisles turn Right-Face in two quick counts and then step forward with 
 the left foot. To the right-flank— Halt ! 
 
 (b) Left face and forward — March! Turn Left-Face in two counts and 
 step forward with the left foot. Left (right) about — Face! Left (right) 
 about— Hah! About— March ! To the Left flank— Halt ! etc. 
 
20 
 
 Lesson 10. Column to the Left by one — March! The first line of children 
 across the front of the room turns Left-Face, and march around the room, 
 then the second Hne turns left and follows, etc. " Column to the left by 5-7 
 {as many as there are aisles), — March !" is given when the pupils get to the 
 back of the room. The first 5-7 children turn Left-Face in the back of the 
 room and march up the aisle (one child in each), all in line with each other. 
 Column to the right by one — March ! The first line turns Right-Face and 
 march around the room. Column to the Right by 5-7 — March ! The first turn 
 Right-Face in the back of the room and march up the aisles to their places. 
 
 Dress Means to Look in the Direction Commanded and See that the Line 
 
 is Straight. 
 
 Fig. 14. — Dress-Right! 
 
 (This may also be taken with both arms at 
 
 sides.) 
 
 (a) Dress — right! (or left)! This s done by turning the head (not the 
 shoulders) to the right (or left), those at the right (or left) end look straight 
 forward; and move to right (or left) until the elbows just touch. This com- 
 mand is given when the class is in a front column of front ranks. 
 
 (b) Forward — dress ! This command is given when the class is in a flank 
 column of flank ranks. Each individual raises arms forward and spaces himself 
 until the fingers just touch the one in front. The leader of the line remains at 
 attention. 
 
21 
 
 RHYTHMICAL STEPS. 
 
 This form of exercise in its proper sphere, as a part of the child's bodily 
 training, is invaluable, for it has the tendency to strengthen in the child its 
 natural sense of rhythm, besides awakening and nourishing a feeling for beauty 
 of form and grace, and an ease of movement unequalled by any other form of 
 exercise. Yet it is advisable to devote slightly less time to the practice of 
 steps than to gymnastic exercises, since it is essential that the body be given, 
 besides grace and ease of carriage, skill, endurance, strength and vigor, in such 
 measure that it will successfully combat the evils of our present environment 
 and sedentary habits of life. 
 
 Rhythmical steps are best practiced in gymnasiums, assembly halls, or large 
 corridors. In the absence of suitable space the steps may be practiced around 
 the room in a circle outside the desks. The steps may be practiced in single 
 line or in column (rank of 2, 3, 4 or more). In ranks of two (couples) the 
 exercise may be executed outward or inward, also in ranks of four. A certain 
 position of the hands should always be taken. In single rank, hands may be 
 placed on hips ; in couples, inner hands may be joined with arms bent, outer 
 hands on hips, or arms crossed to a chain either in front or rear. If a 
 rhythmical step be commanded while the pupils are marching, the command of 
 execution is given as the pupils step with the right foot; all positions taken and 
 movements begun with the left foot. A change from the rhythmical step to the 
 common or regular step is made at the command^ — common (regular) step — 
 march ! When wishing to bring the pupils to a standstill, the command — Class — 
 halt! is used. When the various steps outlined have been mastered, two or 
 more steps may be combined to form a " rhythmical sequence of steps." 
 Example; — four galop steps left forward, four galop steps right forward, and 
 eight marching steps forward. 
 
 Many simple and pleasing combinations may be made, yet care must be 
 exercised in selecting only such steps for combinations as may be performed to 
 the same time in music (2/4, 4/4, 3/4 or 6/8). 
 
 Lesson 1. Place left foot in front of the right, with toes pointed straight 
 ahead. Raise right heel and carry the weight of the body forward on the front 
 foot, with chest well out — not the hips or stomach. Sink the right heel and 
 carry the weight of the body back, evenly on both feet. Repeat this exercise 
 six to eight times. Then change feet, and with the right foot in front, raise the 
 left heel as" above. 
 
 Lesson 2. March around the room on tiptoes, with the toes pointed 
 straight ahead. 
 
 Lesson 3. Place the left foot forward, extending the' instep so as to let 
 the sole of the foot touch the floor before the heel, and at the same time raise 
 the right heel and carry the weight of the body forward on the front foot, on 
 one ; place the right to the left on count two. Place right foot forward, raising 
 the left heel ; place left foot to the right. Continue around the room, beginning 
 alternately with left and right foot — ^in two counts. 
 
 Lesson 4. Place the left foot forward, then immediately bring the toes 
 of the right foot up behind the left heel. Repeat around the room in slow 
 galop time. Same : right foot leading. 
 
 Lesson 5. Place the left foot forward and at the same time raise the right 
 heel, on one; on two, place the right foot in front of left, raising the left heel; 
 on three, repeat count one; on four raise both heels; on five, turn about and 
 begin again with the left foot. Repeat in five counts. 
 
 Lesson 6. Pupils, turned sideward step out sideward with the left foot 
 and bring the right foot up to it, continue four steps to the left. Then begin 
 with the right foot, four steps to the right. After some practice in moderate 
 g^lop time. 
 
22 
 
 Lesson 7. March around the room with chest out . and arms swinging 
 lightly. 
 
 Lesson 8. Change Hop : — Raise left foot slightly sideward, change with a 
 fight hop. 
 
 Lesson 9. Change Hop: — Raise left foot slightly sideward; hop twice on 
 right foot and change feet. 
 
 Lesson 10. Skip, hop around the room. 
 
 Lesson 11. (a) Follow Step: Place left foot forward, with instep well 
 stretched — hall of the foot touching the iioor iirst — carry the weight of the 
 body forward, and raise th-e right heel at first count. On second count place 
 right foot to the left. Continue, with left foot in advance. 
 
 (b) The same : beginning with right foot. 
 
 (c) The same: beginning alternately with left and right. 
 
 (d) The same: with upward bending of knee — at one, bend left knee 
 
 upward; at two, place left foot forward as in (a) ; at three, place 
 right foot to the left. 
 
 (e) The same: with forward raising of the leg; three counts. 
 
 (f) The same: with bending knee backward; three counts. 
 
 (g) The same : with bending knee in front of the other ; three counts. 
 
 Lesson 12. (a) Change Step (in four counts) : Step forward with left 
 foot, on one ; then place right foot up behind left heel, on two, and step for- 
 ward with left foot again, on three, and rest, holding right foot back one beat, 
 on four. Now step forward with right foot, place left foot up behind the right 
 heel, and step forward with the right, resting with left foot back on the fourth 
 count. Continue in four counts, alternately left and right in front. 
 
 (b) The same : with upward bending of knee on the fourth count. 
 
 (c) The same : with forward raising of leg on the fourth count. 
 
 (d) The same: with bending knee in front on fourth count. 
 
 (e) The same: leaving off the fourth count and the rest and taking in 
 
 three counts. 
 
 Lesson 13. (a) Change step sideward with turning about forward: step 
 out to the left side, on one; right foot up to the left heel, on two; left foot 
 sideward again, on three; and on four, turn around to the left on the ball of 
 the left foot and then step out to the right side, turning to the right on the 
 ball of the right foot on count four. 
 
 (b) The same : turning about backward ; step out to left side and on 
 
 count four turn around backward to the right on the ball of the 
 left foot, then step out to the right side, turning around backward 
 to the left on the ball of right, foot after the third count or on 
 count four. 
 
 (c) Double Change Step: the left foot forward, the right foot behind, 
 
 the left foot forward again and right foot behind, and left foot 
 forward. Now right foot forward, left behind, right forward, left 
 behind, right forward. Continue in five counts, alternately left and 
 right. 
 
 Lesson 14. (a) Galop Step. The same as Lesson 11 (a) and (b), but 
 with a slight hop on each foot, beginning with left foot and in galop time. 
 
 (b) The same : beginning with right foot. 
 
 (c) The same: four steps forward with left foot in front, and four steps 
 
 with right, alternately. 
 
23 
 
 (d) Galop Step, sideward, with turning; four Steps left, then turn about 
 
 forward to the left, then four to the right and turn about forwarl 
 to right. 
 
 (e) The same: turning backward to the right on left foot, and backward 
 
 to the left on the right foot, four counts. 
 
 Lesson 15. (a) Polka Step: Change step with an added hop on the 
 fourth count instead of the rest, 
 
 (b) The same : with upward bending of knee on the fourth count. 
 
 (c) The same: with forward raising of leg on the fourth count. 
 
 (d) The same: with bending knee in front on the fourth count. 
 
 (e) The same: sideward left and right. 
 
 Lesson 16. Change Hop, with arms circling: raise arms sideward and 
 left foot shghtly forward : change feet with a hop and circle the arms at the 
 same time, one arm circling over head and the other to the' hip. Continue 
 advancing forward. 
 
 Lesson 17. (a) Touch Step: raise left foot slightly forward and touch 
 the floor lightly with the toes ; then place left foot forward, raising the right 
 heel and carrying the' body forward with chest leading; now raise right foot 
 forward ; continue in two counts. 
 
 (b) The same : bending the opposite knee. 
 
 (c) The same: crossing the feet in front (touching the toes across in 
 
 front of the right foot). 
 
 (d) The same: sideward. 
 
 (c) The same : bending the opposite knee. 
 
 Lesson 18. (a) Double Touch Step: the toes touch twice before the foot 
 is placed forward. 
 
 (b) The' same: bending the opposite knee during the second touch. 
 
 (c) The same: touching first front, then side, and step. 
 
 (d) The same: bending the opposite knee during the second touch. 
 
 (e) The same: touching first front, then rear, and step. 
 
 (f) The same: bending opposite knee during the touch in front. 
 
 (g) The same: bending opposite knee during the touch in rear. 
 
 Leson 19. (a) Double Touch and Polka Step: Use same variations as in 
 Lessons 18 and 15. 
 
 (b) The same: touching heel in front and toes in rear (heel and toe 
 
 polka). 
 
 (c) The same: touching heel in front and toes across in front of opposite 
 
 foot. 
 
 (d) Double Polka: similar to (c), but instead of touching the heel, the 
 
 leg is swung obliquely forward in the first hop, and instead oi 
 touching the toes, the leg is swung in front of the other with 
 bending the knee. 
 
 Lesson 20. (a) Cross Balance Step: place the left foot obliquely for- 
 ward left; cross the right foot in front of left, at the same time rising on the 
 toes ; and in the third count the heels sink. The same to the right. 
 
 (b) The same: swinging the left arm gracefully- over the head when 
 
 stepping to the left, and the right arm when stepping to the right. 
 
 (c) The same: bending the trunk slightly to the right when stepping to 
 
 the left, and bending to the left when stepping to the right. 
 
24 
 
 (d) The same as (b) and (c) combined. 
 
 (e) The same: swinging both arms to left when stepping to the left, and 
 
 to the' right when stepping right. 
 
 Lesson 21. (a) Change Step: sideward with two extra hops and swing- 
 ing the other leg forward and backward. Five counts: one, step out sideward 
 with the left foot ; two, right foot to left ; three, lef foot sideward ; four, hop 
 on left foot and swing the right leg across and in front of the left; five, hop 
 again on the left and swing the right leg behind it. Repeat to the opposite side. 
 
 (b) The same: swinging the left arm over the head and the right arm 
 
 in front of the' body at the fourth count (hopping on the left foot), 
 and both hands on hips at five, and vice versa. 
 
 (c) The same: swinging both arms over head at the' fourth count and on 
 
 hips at the fifth. 
 
GRADED LIST OF FOLK AND AESTHETIC DANCES: 
 
 No. Name. , Page. 
 
 1. Dance of Greeting (Danish), 1st, 2d and 3d grades 28 
 
 2. Carrousel, Merry-go-round (Swedish), 1st, 2d and 3d grades 28 
 
 3. I See You (Swedish), 1st, 2d and 3d grades. 28 
 
 4. Children's Polka (Swedish), 1st, 2d and 3d grades 29 
 
 5. Indian Sun Dance (American), 1st, 2d and 3d grades 29 
 
 6. French Vineyard Dance (French), 1st, 2d and 3d grades 30 
 
 7. Shoemakers' Dance (with skip and hop) (Danish), 1st, 2d and 3d grades 30 
 
 8. Bleking (Swedish), 1st, 2d and 3d grades 30 
 
 9. Kull Dance (Swedish), 1st, 2d and 3d grades 31 
 
 10. May Pole Dance (English), 1st to 6th grades 31 
 
 11. Dainty Step, 2d to 6th grades 32 
 
 12. Pop Goes the Weasel, 1st to 4th grades 32 
 
 13. Clap Dance (Swedish) , 4th and 5th grades 32 
 
 14. Mountain March (Norwegian), 4th and 5th grades S3 
 
 15. Hopp Mor Annika (Swedish), 4th and 5th grades 33 
 
 16. Ace of Diamonds (Danish) , 4th to 8th grades 33 
 
 17. Reap the Flax (Swedish), 4th to 8th grades 34 
 
 18. Minuet (French), 4th to 8th grades 34 
 
 19. Csardas, No. 1 (Hungarian), 4th and 5th grades 35 
 
 20. Czehbogar (Hungarian), 4th to 8th grades 36 
 
 21. Oxdansen (Swedish), 4th to 8th grades 36 
 
 22. Tantoli (Swedish), 4th and 5th grades 38 
 
 23. Tarantella (Italian), 4th to 8th grades 38 
 
 24. Irish Jig (Irish), 6th to 8th grades 38 
 
 25. Irish Lilt (Irish), 6th to 8th grades 39 
 
 26. Varsovienne (Swedish), 6th to 8th grades 40 
 
 27. Swedish Schottische (Swedish), 6th to 8th grades 41 
 
 28. Eros, 6th to 8th grades 42 
 
 29. The Jolly Crowd, 6th to 8th grades 42 
 
 30. Larkspur Mazurka, 6th to 8th grades 43 
 
 31. Polka Boheme, 6th to 8th grades 44 
 
 32. Autumn Leaves, 6th to 8th grades 45 
 
 33. Vanity Schottische, 6th to 8th grades 46 
 
 34. Moonlight Caprice, 6th to 8th grades 46 
 
 35. Csardas, No. 2, or Hungarian Solo, 6th to 8th grades 47 
 
 36. Dutch Dance (Dutch), 6th to 8th grades 48 
 
EXPLANATION OF TECHNICAL TERMS. 
 
 The Fundamental Positions of the Feet and Arms. (Chalif.) 
 Positions of the feet: 
 
 1st. Heels together. 
 
 2nd. Pointing sideward left or right. 
 
 3rd. Heel of right foot to middle of left foot — this is right in 3rd. 
 
 4th. Pointing forward left or right. 
 
 5th. Heel of right foot to toe of the left foot — this is right in 5th. The 
 toes should be turned well out. 
 
 The positions may be taken on the heel, sole, or ball of the' foot. 
 
 Positions of the arms : 
 
 1st. Both curved in front of body to form circle, as in hugging a barrel, 
 midway between waist and shoulder. 
 
 2nd. Pointing sideward left or right. 
 
 3rd. Keep one arm in 2nd, curve the other over the head. The position 
 is named from the upper arm, — for instance if left arm is high, the position is 
 left 3rd. 
 
 4th. One arm in 1st, the other arm over the head. The position is named 
 from upper arm. 
 
 5th Both arms over the head. 
 Lateral arm position : One arm in 2nd and the other in 2nd position closed — 
 for instance, if the right arm was in 2nd and the left arm was in 2nd closed or 
 to the right side (swung across in front of body) we would have arms lateral 
 right. 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 Arabesque. Slide diagonally forward right, right hand extended diagonally 
 forward, left foot raised in rear, left hand extended in rear. 
 
 Assemble. Bring the feet together in 1st or 5th positions. A finish step. 
 
 Caprice Step. Step or slide right foot forward ; bring left foot up to the 
 right and let it take the weight; step on right foot, extend left foot, and hop 
 on right foot. The step may be executed to the side, forward or backward. 
 
 Cross Polka. A polka step making the first step across either in front or 
 behind. 
 
 Flying Turn. Like a three-step-turn, made with leaps. 
 
 Front Crosscut. See (b) under No. 2, " Cutting (Coupe) of Springing 
 Elements," page 115. 
 
 Glide-Balance Step. See No. 6 of Dance-Step-Sequences, nage 116. 
 
 Glide Polka. A polka step in which the three changes of weight are made 
 by gliding. 
 
 Mazurka. (Chahf) Saute (Hop) 1; Glisse (SHde) 2; Coupe (Cut) 3. 
 (Gilbert) Glisse (SHde) 1; Coupe (Cut) 2; Saute (Hop) 3. 
 
 Pas de Cisseaux. 1. Touch right toe in front of left and bend both knees 
 (arms in 1st). 2. Extend right foot forward straightening knees (arms 2nd). 
 
 Peasant Courtesy. Step to right with right foot ; cross left toe behind, and 
 bend knees, keeping the weight on the right foot. 
 
 Pivot Turn. Step to right wih right foot; point left foot in 2nd position; 
 rise on right toe and bring heel down, making the time and turning. Left foot 
 continues pointing (in the turning), keeping the same relative position to the 
 right foot as in starting. 
 
 Polka Step. (1) Classic Polka Step: three changes of weight, beginning 
 with step, either to the side, forward or backward, finishing with an extension. 
 (2) Social Polka Step: hop, slide, cut, step, finishing free foot close to back 
 of ankle. 
 
 Schottische Step. Slide, cut, leap, hop, bringirig the foot to back of ankle. 
 
28 
 
 Three-Step-Turn. Step directly to right with right foot; step directly to 
 the' right with the left foot, making an about face; step directly to left with 
 right foot, and turn again to the front. 
 
 Tour de Basque. 1. Step to right; 2. Cross left over right, placing toes in 
 rear of right; 3. Complete turn to right on toes. Finish with feet in 1st or 3rd 
 and arms in 5th. 
 
 Waltz-Balance Step. See No. 6 of Dance-Step Sequences, page 116. 
 
 For other Terms, see "Rhythmical Steps," pages 21 to 24; and " Outline for 
 the Artistic Execution of Fancy Steps, Step-Combinations and Series" pages 
 114 to 121. 
 
 DANCE OF GREETING. 
 
 Single circle — partners face center of circle. 
 
 1. Clap twice and bow to partner, pointing with foot nearest partner, and 
 taking hold of skirts. 4 counts. 
 
 Repeat, only bow to dancer on the other side. 
 
 Stamp twice and turn around, starting with foot farthest from partner. 
 
 Repeat 1. 
 
 2. All join hands, face right, starting with right foot run 16 running steps, 
 turn, and 16 running steps back left. 
 
 It should be remembered that the movements in part 1 represent a happy 
 greeting to all dancers, while the second part expreses the pleasure of all being 
 together. 
 
 CARROUSEL. 
 
 Class forms a double circle around room, all facing center. The front ones join 
 hands in a circle; the ones in back place hands on partners' shoulders. 
 
 I. Long slide to right with right foot, close left foot to right. 2 counts. 
 Repeat, continuing to right for 18 counts. Same, sidestepping 8 counts, but 
 stamping instead of slides. (4 'side steps.) When sung, the 4 stamps are made 
 on words " up mate, surely late." 28 counts. 
 
 II. Still moving to right with time slightly accelerated, execute the same 
 step but in double time, (Two sides to two counts.) 32 counts. 
 
 Repeat whole dance. Partners immediately change place. 
 
 This dance is of Swedish origin and represents a Swedish " Merry-Go- 
 Round of Flying Horses." During the first part the merry-go-round is sup- 
 posed to be just starting and moves slowly; in the second part it is in full 
 swing and the fun is at its height. The words sung are : 
 
 I. 
 
 Pretty maiden, sweet and gay, 
 
 Carrousel is running. 
 
 It will run till evening: 
 
 Little ones a nickel, big ones a dime. 
 
 Hurry up! Get a mate! 
 
 Or you'll surely be late. 
 
 n. 
 
 Ha, ha, ha ! Happy are we, 
 
 Anderson and Henderson and Peterson and me ! 
 
 Ha, ha, ha ! Happy are we, 
 
 Anderson and Henderson and Peterson and me ! 
 
 I SEE YOU. 
 
 Two double line formations facing towards each other, six feet apart. 
 "A" stands behind " B " with hands on shoulders of " B." " B " stands 
 with hands on hips. 
 
29 
 
 1. "A" leans head to right and looks over partner's shoulder across at 
 "A" of opposite couple. 2 counts. 
 
 Same left. Repeat 1 in double time. 
 Repeat whole. 
 
 2. Clap own hands and at the same time springing forward to left of 
 partner and grasp the hands of ''A" from the opposite side, swinging vigorously 
 around to left. 8 counts. 
 
 Clap own hands and grasp hands of " B " (partner) and swing right. 
 Resume original formation with " B " standing behind ''A." 
 Repeat whole dance. 
 
 Words of the song: 
 
 A. 
 I see you ; I see you, 
 Tra la la la la la la la 
 I see you ; I see you, 
 Tra la la la la la ! 
 
 B. 
 
 You see me and I see you, 
 
 Then you take me and I'll take you, 
 
 You see me and I see you, 
 
 Then you take me and I'll take you. 
 
 CHILDREN'S POLKA. 
 
 Formation: Partners facing each other in single circle join hands and extend' 
 
 arms sideways shoulder high. 
 Measures : 
 
 1 — • 8 Glide polka towards the center of the circle (Glide Polka : Slide, close, 
 slide, close, three running steps in place). Repeat, moving away from 
 circle two measures. Repeat the whole step four measures. 
 
 9 — 12 Clap thighs with both hands. Clap own hands in slow time'. Clap 
 
 partners' hands three times in quick time. Repeat. 
 13 — 14 Point right toe forward, place right elbow in left hand, and shake 
 finger at partner three times. Repeat left. 
 
 15 Turn complete circle right, with four jumps. 
 
 16 Stamp three times. 
 
 1 — 16 Repeat from beginning. 
 
 INDIAN SUN DANCE. 
 
 All are seated on the Hoor, forming a circle. Pantomime (praying for success 
 in the hunt). Arms folded on the chest, sway body from one side to the 
 other several times; arms forward and upward raised trunk bend slightly 
 backward, then body and arms bend forward to -floor. 
 
 DANCE : 
 
 1. All stand and face right in single circle formation. Stoop forward, 
 right arm bent, left arm straight ; right knee bent upward, alternate arm and 
 leg positions, two times in slow time, then three times in double quick time. 
 (Indian Pow Wow.) 16 measures. 
 
 2. (a) Right hand slaps floor; left hand slaps floor; right hand across 
 the mouth and give war whoop. Repeat slapping floor and yelling. 
 
 (b) Two Pow Wow steps. 
 
 (c) Repeat (a). 
 
 (d) Repeat (b). 16 measures. 
 
30 
 
 3. Heralds or scouts : Choose a few scouts, (a) Two pow wow steps 
 forward around inside of circle while others sit down. 4 measures. 
 
 (b) Place ear to the ground. 3 measures. Jump up and yell once on the 
 first count of the 4th measure. 
 
 (c) Repeat (a) and (b), yelling twice during 4th measure. 
 One yell means No ! Two yells mean Yes ! 
 
 4. (a) All jump up when scouts yell the second time. Braves take 
 pow wow step twice. 4 measures. 
 
 (b) Kneel and shoot bow and arrow: one, right hand over left shoulder ; 
 two, place arrow in bow; three, pull arrow back; four, let arrow go. Repeat 1. 
 
 (c) Repeat (a) and (b). 
 
 5. Repeat No. 2. 
 
 6. Repeat No. 1. 
 
 FRENCH VINEYARD DANCE. 
 Partners in single circle facing center. 
 
 1. Stoop down and with right hand make motion of patting ground. 
 Stamp three times — right, left, right — hands on hips. Repeat three times. The 
 last time turn around (right) while stamping. 
 
 Chorus: Join hands in circle and run 16 steps right, turn and 16 steps 
 left. Partners lock right arms and swing in place 8 counts. Lock left arms 
 and swing. 
 
 2. Make motion of gathering grapes — raise right hand high, rise on toes 
 and look up into branches. Put grapes in basket (found by curving left arm). 
 Stamp three times. Repeat three times. The last time put grapes in mouth 
 instead of basket and turn in place. 
 
 Chorus: Same. 
 
 Join hands in circle. No. 1 leads off in serpentine fashion. 
 
 SHOEMAKER'S DANCE. 
 
 Double circle formation. Partners facing each other. 
 
 1. Partners face each other and with hands parallel to chest, revolve them 
 around as quickly as possible. (This represents the winding of the thread.) 
 4 counts. 
 
 Reverse winding in opposite direction, 4 .counts. 
 Jerk the elbows back vigorously twice. 4 counts. 
 
 Strike right clenched fist on the left open palm three times. (This repre- 
 sents driving the pegs.) 
 Repeat. 
 
 2. Partners turn; both face in line of direction, inside hands joined, out- 
 side hand on hip, and all polka around the circle. To execute the polka both 
 step forward on outside foot, turning towards partner, close inside foot to 
 outside, step forward with outside foot and hop. 4 counts. 
 
 Repeat, beginning with inside foot, turning away from partner, and continu- 
 ing same. 8 times. 
 
 Use skip and hop instead of the polka in first three grades. 
 
 BLEKING. 
 
 Formation: Double circle around room. Partners facing each other. Both 
 arms raised forward, clasping hands with partners. 
 1. Jump right heel forward, right arm forward, elbow straight, left elbow 
 bent. Twist body slightly to right. 2 counts. Jump, reversing the position. 
 2 counts. 
 
31 
 
 Continue 3 times in double' time, holding position on 4th count. 
 Repeat whole step 3 times. 
 
 11. With arms outstretched partners execute step called " Hop Waltz." 
 "A" hops twice on right foot, twice on left, moving forward and turning. 
 " B " starts with left foot. 
 
 Repeat whole dance. 
 
 KULL DANCE (LASSIES' DANCE). 
 
 Formation: Partners face each other .in single circle, with hands on hips. 
 
 Measures : 
 1 — ■ 8 Place right toe forward, turn half turn to left and bow to neighbor. 
 
 Reverse and bow to partner. Repeat three times. 
 9 — 12 Make twelve kicking steps in place, beginning with left foot, keeping 
 left knee extended. (Kicking step: kick left foot forward, and then 
 right; alternate.) Make three kicking steps to a measure. 
 13 — 14 Clap both hands and stamp with the left foot on the' first count and 
 joining hands turn each other once around with three running steps. 
 Finish facing each other as before. 
 1 — 14 Repeat from beginning. 
 
 MAY POLE DANCE — "BLUFF KING HAL." 
 
 Formation: Couples in double circle formation around the pole, all facing in 
 the same direction. Inside hand joined shoulder-high, and outside hand on 
 ■ hip, or holding skirts. 
 
 Measures : 
 1 — 4 Introduction. All stand with the right foot forward. 
 
 I. 
 
 1 — 6 Beginning with the right foot, all skip and hop around the pole, making 
 
 two skips to each measure. 
 7 — 8 Couples swing in facing the pole, join hands forming a single' circle — 
 
 with four skipping steps. 
 
 II. 
 
 1 — 2 All advance toward pole, with four skipping steps, hands high from 
 
 low position. 
 3 — • 4 All move back from pole, with four skipping steps, hands low from 
 
 high position. 
 5— 8 Repeat 1—4. 
 
 III. 
 1 — 8 Partners joining right hands and taking skirts with left, turn each 
 
 other with skipping steps, two steps to a measure'. Finish with No. 1 
 
 inside with back to pole and facing partner. 
 
 IV. 
 
 1 Take hold of skirts and both starting to" the right, take polka step to 
 
 the right (step to right with right foot, close left foot to right, step 
 right, and swing left across in front of right). 
 
 2 Hop on left foot, swinging right across in front of left; same right. 
 3 — 4 Repeat 1 — 2, starting left, back to place in front of partner. 
 
 5— 8 Repeat 1—4. 
 
 V. 
 
 1— 7 Repeat III._ 
 
 8 All swing into a single circle. 
 
■ '■■ ' .32 ■ ' . : 
 
 VL 
 
 1 — 8 All skip around the circle — two skipping steps to a measure. 
 
 VIL 
 1— 8 Repeat II. 
 
 VIII. 
 1 — ' 2 With four skipping steps the first couple advances to the pole, and 
 
 grasps a ribbon with the right hand. . 
 3 — 4 Four steps back to place, and immediately face each other, with right 
 foot pointed toward partner,. No. 1 turned slightly toward the pole 
 and No. 2 slightly away from the pole. 
 5 — 6 Second couple the same. 
 
 Continue until all have taken ribbons. 
 
 IX. 
 
 1 — 16 Winding the May Pole. Use skipping steps — making grand chain, 
 Number Twos moving around the circle from right to left, Number 
 Ones opposite, 
 
 1 — 8 Repeat II, dropping streamers. Leader lead off with skipping steps. 
 
 THE DAINTY STEP. 
 
 Couples facing in double circle formation. Inside hands joined, outside hands 
 
 on hips. 
 
 Point outside foot in front, to side, behind, drop hands and turn around, 
 away from partner (making a three-quarter turn until you face partner). All 
 step in line of direction, place inside foot behind and bend knees 2 counts. 
 Step and bend opposite. 
 
 Join hands with partner, arms extended, 4 slides in line of direction. Drop 
 forward hands and step forward 3 steps, beginning with inside foot, and point 
 outside- foot. 
 
 Repeat whole dance, pointing with outside foot again. , 
 
 This dance should be executed with daintiness and grace. 
 
 POP GOES THE WEASEL. 
 
 Sets of three couples. Partners facing each other. First couples are those on 
 the outside, nearest the wall. 
 
 First couple walks or skips down outside of lines, 8 steps down and 8 steps 
 back. Take partner's hands and slide down between Hues, 8 counts, and back, 
 8 counts. Join hands with one of the second couple and skip around in a circle, 
 12 counts, then open hands and push her through quickly, " pop." Next with 
 partner No. 2 of same couple. 
 
 Down the outside 8 slides or skips, back 8 slides or skips, slide down 
 between lines, 8 counts, and back and circle in same way with third couple. 
 As soon as first couple has finished they stop where third couple stood before, 
 and second couple continues the dance. Keep on until each couple has danced 
 it all. 
 
 SWEDISH CLAP DANCE. 
 
 Double circle, formation facing in line o.f direction, inside hands joined, outside 
 
 hands on hips. 
 
 1. Polka 8 times, beginning with outside foot, close inside foot up to 
 outside, step on outside foot and hop. Continue same, starting inside foot. 
 
 2. Heel and toe polka 4 times, placing outside heel forward, lean body 
 back; place outside toes back, lean forward, step on outside foot, bring inside 
 foot up to it, step on outside and hop. 
 
33 
 
 3. (a) Face partner, girls on outside of circle bow, placing left foot back 
 holding skirts ; boys inside bow with heels together. 4 counts. Stamp 3 times. 
 Repeat. 
 
 (b) Partners clap right hands^ own hands, left hands, own hands, turning 
 in place, stamp 3 times. 
 
 4. Repeat 3 (a). 
 
 Place right foot across and shake right forefinger 3 times, sartfe left, same 
 right, place hands on hips, turning in place, stamp 3 times, 
 
 NORWEGIAN MOUNTAIN MARCH. 
 
 Formation: Triangle, one leader and two followers. Leader holds a hand- 
 kerchief in each hand. Those following grasp handkerchief in outside 
 hands, inside hands joined. 
 
 Measures : 
 
 1 — 16 Change step forward on toes, stamping on first step; eight times and 
 repeat. Bend in direction of moving foot. 
 17 — 24 Leader stamps once and makes a complete turn to the left under her 
 own left arm; number two, who is at the left and back of the leader, 
 moves forward under the arms of one and three and makes a com- 
 plete turn around one ; while number three makes a complete turn 
 around to the right. 
 1 — 24 Repeat from beginning. 
 
 HOP, MOR ANNIKA. 
 
 Formation: Partners facing forward in double circle. Inside hands joined 
 high, outside hands on hip. 
 
 Introduction: Bow to partners and take hands facing front. 
 
 Measures : 
 
 1 — 4 Sixteen brisk walking steps around circle in line of direction, begin- 
 Repeated. ning with outside foot and swing the arms.. 
 
 5 — 8 Sixteen skipping steps (skip and hop), swinging arms. Finish facing 
 Repeated. partner. 
 
 9 — 12 Stamp right foot forward and clap partner's right hand. Clap own 
 Repeated. hands. Take this figure four times, facing forward for finish. 
 13 — 20 Turning toward and away from partners, polka in hne of direction 
 around circle. Start outside foot. 
 Repeat from beginning, changing partners to the right on introduction. 
 
 ACE OF DIAMONDS. 
 
 Formation: Partners face each other in double circle. 
 Measures : 
 
 1 — 4 Clap hands smartly on first count, step on second count, hook right 
 
 elbows and, starting with the left foot, swing partner around, taking 
 
 the " hop-polka " step (hop on left and change step beginning with 
 
 right foot— rt.. It., rt.). 
 
 •5 — 8 Repeat, hooking left elbows and starting opposite foot and direction. 
 
 Finish in original position. 
 9 — -12 Number one (facing the center of the circle) steps forward on the 
 right foot and hops on right foot, swinging left across in fron/t. 
 Arms folded high on chest. 
 Number two executes the same step, but moving backward. 4 step 
 hops toward the center of the circle. 
 13 — 16 Repeat, but number one moves backward and number one forward, 
 away from center of circle. 
 
34 
 
 17 — 24 Partners now standing side by side (facing in line of direction), inside 
 hands joined high, outside hand on hip, polka forward, turning toward 
 and away from partner. Start with outside foot. 
 Repeat from beginning. 
 
 REAP THE FLAX. 
 
 Formation: Girls in parallel columns of Hve, all facing front. Number 
 one of each rank is the leader. Hands are placed on hips. 
 
 I 1. All reach down in front as if to seize the flax. 3 counts. 
 
 2. Return to standing position pulling hands up to waist as if reaping the 
 
 flax. 3 counts. 
 3. Throw flax over right shoulder. 
 4. Hands on hips. 3 counts. 
 Repeat. 
 
 Chorus. All make quarter turn to left, single file. Number one with 
 hands on hips, others placing hands on shoulders of girl in front. 
 All take change step in a circle beginning left and leader turning 
 left. 24 counts. On last 3 counts stamp twice in place making a 
 quarter turn right facing front once more. 
 Repeat all of I. 
 
 H 1. All reach down to right. 
 
 2. Make a movement forward crossing hands in front of head, as if 
 
 placing flax on hackle. 
 
 3. Jerk hands toward body as if pulling flax forcibly from hackle. 
 
 4. Hands on hips. Repeat. 
 
 Chorus. Same as in I. Repeat all of H. 
 
 HI Numbers two and four step forward in front of numbers three and 
 
 five, forming a square. These four dancers with the right hands 
 across center of square, grasp thumbs of opposite dancer, left hand 
 on hip. These four represent the spinning wheel. 
 
 Number one, the leader, turns in place and stands facmg the other 
 four. She represents the spinner. 
 1. With twelve' running steps the dancers forming spinning wheels run 
 around the left. Turn about grasping left thumbs running to right. 
 
 Number one claps hands on first count of each measure and the left 
 foot stamps as if treading wheel. 24 counts. 
 
 Chorus. Same as in II. 
 
 IV Repeat all of III. 
 
 All take same positions as in III. Numbers two, three, four and five 
 • stand still while number one with 24 running steps weaves in and 
 
 out the square, returning to place. 
 Chorus. Same as in I. 
 
 V Repeal all of IV. 
 
 All face left, leader of first group with hands on hips, all others 
 hands on shoulders of one in front. Leader takes them all in circle, 
 then diagonally across center and off. Completed thread. 
 
 MINUET. 
 
 Formation: In couples, inside hands joined. Begin with outside feet. 
 
 Counts : 
 
 I. 
 1-12 Minuet march (three light marching steps, and point inside foot to side. 
 Bend body towards the pointing foot, head well poised over shoulder. 
 Repeat beginning inside foot.) 
 
Ob 
 
 1- 3 Take one step away from each other (still facing front, disengaging 
 
 hands), and point inside' foot toward partner. 
 4- 6 Take one step towards each other and point outside foot away. 
 7- 9 Glide outside foot forward, facing partner 
 10-12 Bow and curtsey. 
 
 II. 
 1- 6 Taking right hands, hold them high and look under (3 counts) and 
 
 over (3 counts) at your partner. 
 7- 9 March three steps to opposite places, turning on the third step. 
 10-12 Disengage hands and curtsey and bow. 
 1-12 Repeat back to places. 
 
 III. 
 1- 3 Join right hands, take three marching steps around to the left. 
 
 4- 6 Disengage hands, curtsey and bow. 
 
 7- 9 Join left hands, take three marching steps back to place. 
 10-12 Same as 4-6. 
 1-12 Repeat, taking left hands and starting right. 
 
 IV. 
 
 1- 6 Both turn to the right. Minuet march forward, beginning with the right 
 
 foot. 
 7-12 Turning right, start with the left foot and Minuet march forward. 
 1-12 Repeat 1-12 making a square. 
 
 V. 
 
 1- 6 Facing front, take inside hands and step back to back with the outside 
 
 foot and point the inside foot. 
 7-12 Step back with the inside foot and point the outside foot forward (now 
 
 facing each other). 
 1-12 Repeat 1-12. 
 
 VI. 
 1- 6 Take right hands. (Same as 1-6 Figure II.) 
 7-12 March around six steps. 
 1-12 Glide, curtsey, and bow. 
 Finish facing front. 
 
 CSARDAS, NO. i. 
 
 Formation: In couples facing each other. Number One, with hands on partner's 
 waist, Number Two, with hands on partner's shoulders. In Parts I and 
 III, Number Two begins with the right foot, otherwise same as described. 
 
 Measures : 
 
 Part I. 
 1- 8 Stamp to the side with left foot (count 1), close right foot to left, 
 clicking heels sharply together (courft 2), repeat starting iright 
 (counts 3-4) one measure. Alternate left and right. 
 
 Part II. 
 1- 4 Beginning left foot, both partners turn each other in place, making four 
 walking steps to a measure. On counts 3-4 of the fourth measure, 
 close the right foot to the left (on count 3), click heels (on count 4). 
 
 5- 8 Repeat same starting with right, turning partner in place. 
 
 Part III. 
 1- 8 Touch left toe to the left side (heel high) and at the same time hop 
 on the right foot (count 1), reverse the position of the foot — heel 
 down, toes high — , and at the same time hop on the' right foot (count 
 2) ; repeat starting with right foot (counts 3^), one measure. Alter- 
 nate left and right. 
 
36 
 
 Part IV. 
 1- 3 Partners turn each other in place wih the following step : Step forward 
 on left foot (count 1), step forward on the right foot and hop on 
 right (count 2 and) ; repeat this same step (counts 3-4 and), one 
 measure. Repeat. 
 
 4 Repeat the same step just 'described (counts 1-2 and), step forward on 
 left foot (count 3), with a jump bring the heels together with a sharp 
 ■ click, and face squarely toward partners (count 4 and). 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4 of Part IV, beginning with right foot and turning in opposite 
 direction. 
 During the turning the partners should lean away from each other, and 
 ; swing each other vigorously. Repeat at will. 
 
 CZEHBOGAR (HUNGARIAN). 
 
 Formation: Couples in single circle with hands joined. 
 
 1 Seven slides left and kick. 
 Seven slides right and kick. 
 
 2 Facing centre hands joined high. Four walking steps forward, with 
 
 hands from low position to hands overhead. Four steps back, body 
 bend forward. 
 
 3 Face partner placing right arm around waist, left arm high, lame man's 
 
 walking step: — hop on left foot, step on right, step on left, hop on 
 left foot, step on right, step on left, etc. (4 measures.) 
 
 4 Four steps toward centre, partners still facing, arms on partners' 
 
 shoulders drawing up rear foot. Bend body over rear foot. Four steps 
 back. Arms on shoulders of partner. 
 Two steps same in both directions. 
 
 5 Finish with lame man's walking step. 
 
 Join circle and repeat whole dance twice. Finish with a shout. 
 
 OXDANSEN. 
 
 Formation: The dancers stand facing each other about two steps apart with 
 their hands on hips. All those on the left-hand side are numbered one, 
 and their partners are numbered two. If there are several dancers, they 
 form two lines facing each other. 
 
 Part I. 
 Measures. 
 
 1 Dancers stand still ,at attention! 
 
 2 No. 1 bows to No. 2, while No. 2 makes a deep courtesy to No. 1. 
 
 3 Same as Measure 1. 
 
 4 No. 2 bows to No. 1, while No. 1 makes a deep courtesy to No. 2. 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4. These movements are done slowly. 
 
 9-16 The bows and courtesies are continued in quicker time, one for each 
 measure. 
 
 Side Step. 
 
 17 No. 1 places his clenched fists on chest, elbows shoulder high, then flings 
 
 the arms and the right leg sideways (counts 1-2) ; taking a long step 
 to the right (count 4). 
 
 18 No. 1 stamps three times (right, left, right), placing the fists on the 
 
 chest again, 
 19-20 Same to the opposite side. 
 21-24 Repeat Measures 17-20. 
 
 No. 2 dances in the same direction, as No, 1, therefore beginning with 
 
 opposite foot. 
 
2>7 
 
 Part II. 
 
 1 With the hands on the hips the dancers stand still. 
 
 2 With a spring, place right foot forward and hold throughout this and the 
 
 third measure. 
 
 3 Hoid position, 
 
 4 With a spring, feet change. 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4. ' 
 
 9-16 Continue the same movement in quicker time, the feet changing place 
 
 twice in each measure. 
 17-24 Side step same as 17-24 in Part I. 
 
 Part III. 
 
 1 The dancers place right hands on top of each other's heads far back, 
 
 and stand still. 
 
 2 No. 1 pulls No. 2's head forward. 
 
 3 Hold same position. 
 
 4 No. 2 pulls No. I's head forward, at the same time making own erect. 
 5- 8 Repeat 1^. 
 
 9-16 Continue same movement in quicker time, pulling and raising head twice 
 
 during each measure. 
 17-24 Side step same as 17-24 in Part I. 
 
 Part IV. 
 
 1 With hands on the hips, the dancers stand still. 
 
 2 Both turn with a jump to the left (quarter turn) so thsft their right 
 
 elbows touch. 
 
 3 Hold this position. 
 
 4 Both make a half turn to the right with a jump and touch left elbows. 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4. 
 
 9-16 Continue same movement in quicker time, jumping twice during each 
 measure. At the last jump the dancers turn a quarter circle, facing 
 each other again. 
 17-24 Side step same as 17-24 in Part I. 
 
 Part V. 
 
 1 With hands on hips and right foot forward, dancers stand still. 
 
 2 No. 1 makes a vigorous movement with the right arm as if boxing No. 2's 
 
 left ear, and immediately replaces right hand on hip ; at the same time 
 No. 2 claps own hands together down in front, making a sharp noise, 
 immediately replacing hands on hips. 
 
 3 Both stand still. 
 
 4 Same as Measure 2, but No. 2 strikes and No. 1 claps hands. 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4. 
 
 9-16 Continue the same movement in quicker time, making two movements to 
 each measure and not replacing the hands on hips between movements. 
 17-24 Side step same as 17-24 in Part I. 
 
 Part VI. 
 
 1 With right foot advanced, hands on hips, dancers stand still. 
 
 2 Both strike diagonally forward with the right fist clenched, thrusting 
 
 under partner's right arm. 
 
 3 Hold same position. 
 
 4 Replace the right hand on hip and at the same time thrust with left fist. 
 5- 8 Repeat the same. 
 
 9-16 Continue same movements in quicker time without replacing hands on 
 
 hips, and making two thrusts to a measure. 
 17-24 Side step same as 17-24 in Part I. 
 
 On the last count hold this position with the hands clenched at the chest, 
 partners looking sternly at each other for a moment, then shake hands. 
 
38 
 
 TANTOLI (SWEDISH). 
 
 Formation: Partners stand side by side, the man on the left, the girl on the 
 right, the man with his right arm around the girl's waist, and she with 
 her left hand on his shoulder. The outside hand of each on the hip. 
 
 Part I. 
 Measures. 
 
 1 Place the outside foot forward with the toes raised (lean slightly back- 
 
 ward) 1-2; place the outside foot backward, toe touching the floor 
 (lean sHghtly forward) 3-4, 
 
 2 Beginning with the outside foot, one polka step forward. 
 3- 4 Same as Measure 1-2, beginning with the inside foot. 
 5- 8 Repeat Measures 1-4. 
 
 Part II. 
 
 1- 7 The man takes his partner by the waist with both hands, and she puts 
 both hands on his shoulders. With partners in this position dance 
 around with the hop waltz (change hop with two hops), the man 
 stepping first on his left foot and the girl on her right. 
 
 8 The man Hfts his partner high in the air (she assisting him by jumping) 
 
 1-2; and puts her down on his right side, 3; pause, 4. 
 Repeat the whole dance as often as desired. 
 
 Grade 6. 
 
 TARANTELLA. 
 
 Double circle formation, facing partners. Both hands high over head, snapping 
 fingers in time with music. 
 
 1 All run forward 4 steps, starting with right foot, passing partner, turn 
 
 around in place with four running steps. 
 All run back to place 4 counts, turn around in place with four running 
 steps. 16 counts. 
 
 2 Clap hands, jumping left foot across — 2 counts, change to right, to left, 
 
 to right. 8 counts. Hands outstretched close to partner, slide around 
 in place beginning with left foot, close right foot to left, etc., and back 
 to position. 8 counts. 
 Repeat. 
 
 3 Clap hands, jumping left foot in front, and continue as in 2. 16 counts. 
 Repeat. 
 
 4 Hands on hips, jump half turn to right, rt. toe forw., rise on toes, 
 
 sink. 4 counts. Jump left, It. toe forw., etc. 24 counts. (6 times, 
 3 times to each side.) 
 Left hand behind back, right outstretched, join left hand with partner's 
 right and right hand with partner's left and hop around on inside foot 
 the remaining 8 counts. 
 
 5 All turn to their right and run around circle, those on inside running 
 
 in opposite direction from those on outside. 32 counts. 
 Repeat the whole dance from the second step in fours so that in the 
 
 jumping across step the left foot points across set of fours to opposite 
 
 dancer. 
 All lock right hands in center of sets of four and run around 8 counts. 
 After step 4 all run off in couples running right. 
 
 IRISH JIG — "ST. PATRICK'S DAY." 
 
 Formation: Couples facing front in double line formation, arms akimbo,. 
 
 knuckles 'on hips. 
 
 1 Stamp forward with right foot, close left to right and kick right forward, 
 flinging right 3 times. Repeat 4 times in all, alternating right and left. 
 
39 
 
 2 Turn Joward partner, point right foot forward 4 times same time hopping 
 
 on left foot ; change pointing left ; change pointing right ; clap hands 
 and cross on left of partner using skip and hop. 
 Repeat same, back to partner, and skip and hop backward to place. 
 
 3 Turn front (now in original position). Jump vigorously once, hopping 
 
 on left foot, flinging right 3 times. In executing this step the dancers 
 move forward when they hop. Repeat right and left foot four times. 
 
 4 Hop twice on left foot, holding right high in back, 1-2. 
 Hop twice on right foot, holding left high in front, 3-4. 
 Repeat 5-12. 
 
 Break 13-16 (Break:) jump to stride, feet apart, arms sideways raise 
 on 1 ; jump feet together, arms in front with clap of hands on 2; swing 
 right leg backward, 3 ; swing right leg forward, on 4. 
 
 5 Displace left foot with right, swinging left backward on 1 ; hop on right 
 
 and swing left forward on 2 ; displace right foot with left, swinging 
 right leg backward on 3 ; hop on left, and swing right forward on 4. 
 Continue same up to 12th count — use same break as in No. 4 on counts 
 13, 14, 15 and 16. 
 
 6 Right heel forward, left heel forward, skip hop backward for four counts, 
 
 bending body sideward ; walk forward 4 steps, beginning right foot ; 
 with all weight on right push with the left foot, pivoting on right foot 
 4 counts. Arms folded high in front. 
 
 7 Walk forward 4 steps, pivot turn right 4 counts ; step and bend to the 
 
 right 4 counts, peasants courtesy to left, 4 counts. 
 
 THE IRISH LILT. 
 
 Formation: Open order, class in open order, individuals eight feet apart. 
 
 First Step — Forward Rock 
 Measures. 
 
 1- 6 Hop with weight on left foot, raising the right foot backward (count 
 one) ; hop on the right foot, raising the left foot forward (count two). 
 (Two counts to each measure.) Repeat up to twe've counts, always 
 raising the left foot forward and the right foot backward. 
 
 7- 8 "Break," swinging the right foot backward. and forward. 
 
 1- 8 Repeat Measures 1-8, but with right foot forward and left foot back. 
 
 " Break." 
 
 Spring and spread feet (count one) ; spring and bring the feet together 
 again (count two); hop and raise left leg backward (count three); 
 hop and kick left leg forward (count four). Two measures. The 
 break is used only as a connecting step. 
 
 Second Step — Kick. 
 
 1- 6' Spring and raise left leg backward (count one) ; spring and kick left 
 leg forward (count two) ; spring on left and raise right leg backward 
 (count three) ; spring and kick right leg forward (count four). Re- 
 peat up to twelve counts. 
 
 7- 8 "Break" (four counts). 
 
 1- 8 Repeat this step with " break," measures 1-8. 
 
 Third Step — Toe and Heel. 
 1- 6 Spring on right foot, facing right, and stretching left leg backward and 
 to the left of the starting position, placing the left toe on the floor 
 (count one) ; hop on right foot facing left about and placing the left 
 heel where the toe was (count two) ; hop on right foot facing front, 
 placing left toe on the floor in front of the right foot (count three) ; 
 hop on the right foot and kick left leg forward (count four). Spring 
 on the left foot, facing to left with right leg extended and toe on the 
 floor (count five). Proceed as with left leg (counts six, seven and 
 eight). Repeat with left leg (counts nine to twelve). 
 
7-8 "Break" (four counts). 
 
 1- 8 Starting with right leg repeat 1-8. 
 
 Fourth Step — Side Step. 
 1-12 Place left leg across in front of right and left foot on floor to right of 
 right foot (count one) ; place right foot to right of left foot but in 
 ■ back (count two) ; continue same as counts one and two (counts three 
 to seven) ; hop on left foot and slightly backward, i: winging the right 
 leg forward (counts eight) ; repeat same to the opposite side, swinging 
 the right foot to left of left foot in front, etc. (counts nine to fifteen) ; 
 hop on right foot and swing left leg forward (count sixteen). Repeat 
 counts one to eight (counts seventeen to twenty-four). 
 " Break " and bring the right leg forward. 
 1-12 Repeat Measures 1-12. 
 
 Fifth Step— Leg Twist and Kick. 
 1-16 Similar to the third step, " Toe and Heel," except that the toe and heel 
 of the extended leg are not placed on the floor. 
 
 Sixth ■ Step — Kick. 
 1-16 Repeat the second step. 
 
 VARsbviENNE. 
 
 Music: " The Dorothy." 
 Formation: Partners side by side, inside hand joined shoulder high. 
 
 Counts: Part I. 
 
 1 Slide left sideways, arms sideways. 
 
 2 Displace with right foot, raising left sideways. 
 
 3 Hop on right. 
 
 4 Step on left, pointing right sideways. Raise left arm upward, right 
 
 arm across the body. (Steps 1-4 represent the Varsovienne step.) 
 
 5- 6 Hold position. 
 
 7-12 Repeat to right. 
 13-24 Repeat 1 to 12. 
 25-36 Three mazurka steps left. 
 37-48 Three mazurka steps right. Repeat. 
 
 Part H. 
 
 No. 1 in front of No. 2. No. 1 represents the lady. Arms extended, 
 
 hands joined. No. 1 sideways starting left. No. 2 in place. 
 Repeat 1-48 of Part 1. Repeat. 
 
 Part HI. 
 Side by side. 
 
 No. 1 Varsovienne sideways, beginning right. 
 No. 2 Varsovienne sideways, beginning left. 
 No. 1 Varsovienne sideways, beginning left. 
 No. 2 Varsovienne sideways, beginning right. 
 Join hands, with the mazurka steps move forward and point. Release 
 
 hands and turn about toward each other. 
 Joint hands No. 1 right, No. 2 left and return to place with three 
 
 mazurka steps, turning toward each other during the point. 
 Repeat. 
 
 Part IV. 
 
 No. 1 face No. 2 and join right hands. Both Varsovienne starting with 
 left foot. Move around each other, each way twice, alternating left 
 and right, then circling with three mazurka steps and back with three. 
 
 Repeat. 
 
41 
 
 Part V. 
 
 Facing each other, both start with left foot. 
 
 1 Cross left foot in front of right raising right foot with Ya turn rt. 
 
 2 Step on right foot with ^ turn right. 
 
 3 Step on left foot. 
 
 4- 6 Point right foot sideways, raise left arm upward across body, look over 
 
 right shoulder at partner. 
 7-12 Cross right foot in front of left with Ya. turn left, repeat 1-6 above. 
 13-24 Repeat 1-12 around the opposite way. 
 
 25-36 No. 1 starts to left with three mazurka steps and pose to partner. No. 2 
 starts to the right. 
 
 Part VI. 
 
 Same as Part 11. On the last count leave' partner and courtsey and bow. 
 
 SWEDISH SCHOTTISCHE. 
 
 Music: Swedish Schottische. 
 
 Formation: In circle, in groups of threes. The gentleman stands in front 
 with arms ^folded and ladies behind with hands on shoulder of one in 
 front. 
 
 Counts : I. 
 
 1- 4 Start with right foot — 3 running steps and swing left leg in front. 
 
 5- 8 Same left. 
 
 9-12 Step right and swing; left and swing. (Step hop.) 
 
 13-16 Same as 9-12. 
 
 17-32 Repeat. Gentleman claps hands and first lady goes to the right and 
 second to the left taking gent's hand, on the first two step hops. On 
 last two step hops, ladies turn outward under his arms. 
 
 II. 
 
 1- 4 All dance forward — gent looking to lady on right. (The steps through- 
 out this dance are the same as 1-16 of I) Schottische forward right. 
 1-4 of I.) 
 
 5- 8 Schottische forward left. (5-8 of I.) 
 
 9-16 Lady on right passes under the arm of the lady on left as they cross 
 in front of gent and turn until they face in opposite direction to that 
 of the gent, using the same step as 9-16 of I. 
 17-32 Repeat 1-16; ladies dancing backward two schottische steps 17-24; then 
 crossing back to original places at the side of gent on last two step 
 hops turn under his arms as in 17-32 of I. 
 
 III. 
 
 1- 8 Same as 1-8 of II. 
 
 9-12 Lady on left passes under the arm of lady on right as they cross in 
 front of gent. Instead of going all the way across to opposite sides 
 of gent, they face him, with their shoulders together and pull back 
 with 13-16. 
 13-16 Step, hop; step, hop. 
 
 1- 8 Gent dances backward now pulling ladies — two schottische steps. 
 
 9-16 Ladies unwind and turn under gents' arms. 
 
 IV. 
 
 1- 4 Drop hands Gent with arms folded high in front goes backward. 
 
 Ladies facing each other join right hands and change places with 
 
 same step as 1-4 of I. 
 5- 8 Gent comes forward and ladies join left hands and cross to original 
 
 places. Same step, 5-8 of I. 
 9-16 Gent claps hands and all place hands on shoulders and take 4 step hops 
 
 in circle. 
 Repeat all I to IV. 
 
42 
 
 EROS. 
 
 Formation: Open order at arms' s-length distance. 
 Mtisic: "Eros," by Geo. D. Martin. 
 
 Measures: Part I. 
 
 1- 8 Introduction : Pose ; raise the arms sideways and hold them there. 
 
 1 Move the left arm down and right sideways — both arms parallel to right. 
 
 2- 5 Cross balance step left, right, left and right sideways, with arms swing- 
 
 ing in half circles downward in the same direction. Trunk bending 
 in the' opposite direction. 
 
 6 Swing the left arm down and to the left side, and the right arm down 
 
 and up in a circle outward to the right side. 
 
 7 Place the right foot behind the left, bend the knees and trunk slightly 
 
 forward. 
 
 8 Straighten knees and trunk and hold position. 
 
 9 Move right arm down and to the left side, arms parallel left. 
 10-16 Repeat measures 2-8, but to the opposite side. 
 
 Part II. 
 1- 3 Three glide-balance steps left sideways, arms in 2nd position. 
 4 Place right foot crossed in front, slightly bend the trunk right sideways, 
 
 place the knuckles of the right hand on the hip, and raise the left 
 arm in a half circle overhead. 
 5- 8 Repeat measures 1-4 to the opposite side. 
 9-16 Repeat 1-8. 
 
 Part III. 
 1-16 Repeat 1-16, Part I. 
 
 Part IV. 
 1- 2 Pose, with arms in 2nd position. 
 
 3- 4 Cross-balance step obliquely left forward and right backward. When 
 
 stepping left, the left arm is swung in a half circle overhead, and the 
 right knuckles are placed on the hip. (Opposite when stepping right.) 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4. 
 
 9-12 Cross-swing hop forward (left, right, left, and right), knuckles placed 
 on hips. (Execution: 1 — step left forward; 2 — swing bend right leg 
 across in front of left; 3 — hop.) 
 13-16 Repeat 9-12, but step backward. 
 17-32 Repeat 1-16. 
 
 Part V. 
 1-16 Repeat 1-16, Part I. 
 
 1-16 Repeat 1-16, Part II. 
 
 Part VI. 
 Part VII. 
 
 1-16 Repeat 1-16, Part I. 
 (Printed by permission of the publisher, John Jos. McVey, Philadelphia, Pa.) 
 
 THE JOLLY CROWD. 
 
 Formation: Olass in open order, pupils being at arm's length apart. 
 
 Part I. 
 
 Measures : 
 
 1- 2 Touch left foot forward and backward (counts 1-2), change step left 
 forward (counts 3-4). Bend the trunk slightly forward, when touch- 
 ing the left foot forward ; and look over the right shoulder when 
 touching the left foot backward. (Knuckles on hips.) 
 
 3- 4 The same right, but while performing the change step face left 
 about (5-8). 
 
 5- 8 Repeat measures 1 to 4 (counts 9 to 16). 
 
46 
 
 Part II. 
 
 1- 2 With a quarter turn left, three steps forward, and touch right foot 
 forward (1 to 4). 
 
 3- 4 With a half turn right, repeat this movement in the opposite direction — 
 i. e., to the right, and touch left foot forward (5-8). 
 
 5- 8 Repeat measures 1-4 (counts 9-16). 
 
 9-16 Repeat measures 1-8, but when executing the touch-step bend the trunk 
 slightly forward, and at the same time swing the rounded arms side- 
 ways (counts 17-32). 
 
 Part III. 
 1- 8 Repeat Part I. 
 
 Part IV. 
 1- 2 Step and leap left sideways (1-2), and touch right foot forward and 
 
 backward (3-4). 
 3- 4 Repeat measures 1-2 to the opposite side (counts 5-8). 
 5- 8 Repeat measures 1-4 (counts 9-16). 
 9-16 Raise the arms sideways and repeat measures 1-8. When performing 
 
 the touch — step right forward and backward ; place the knuckles of the 
 
 right and on the hip and raise the left arm in half circle overhead. 
 
 (Vice versa when touching the left) (counts 17-32). 
 
 Part V. 
 1- 8 Repeat Part I. 
 
 Part VI. 
 1-16 Repeat Part II. 
 
 Part VII. 
 1- 8 Repeat Part I. 
 (Printed by permission of the publisher, John Jos. McVey, Philadelphia, Pa.) 
 
 LARKSPUR MAZURKA. 
 
 Formation: A column of front ranks in open order. Hands at waist, knuckles 
 on hips. 
 
 Measures : Part I. 
 
 1- 4 Three mazurkas to the left and a glide-balance hop left with a full 
 
 turn left in two hops. 
 5- 8 The same right. 
 9-16 Repeat 1-8, but finish with two stamps (left and right) in place of the 
 
 glide-balance hop right, with full turn. 
 
 Part II. 
 1- 2 Three steps forward and point right foot forward and pause. 
 
 3 Waltz-balance step obliquely forward right. 
 
 4 Glide-balance hop left, with a full turn left. 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4, beginning right. 
 
 9-16 Repeat 1-8, but taking three steps backward instead of forward, and 
 closing with two stamps. 
 
 Part III. 
 1-16 Repeat Part I, with arms folded in front shoulder high, during the step; 
 replace hands at waist during the stamps. 
 
 Part IV. 
 
 1 Front cross-cut left and two hops left, with the left arm raised to a 
 
 half circle over head. 
 
 2 Rear cross-cut right and hop twice on the right foot, replacing the left 
 
 hand at waist. 
 
44 
 
 3- 4 Three steps left sideward, with a rear cross step right, the arms raised 
 sideward; point right foot forward and pause, with right arm moved 
 in front of body. 
 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4, beginning right, and moving right sideward. 
 
 9-16 Repeat 1-8. 
 
 Part V. 
 
 1- 2 Mazurka to the left and glide — balance hop left, with a full turn left, 
 
 arms folded shoulder high. 
 3- 4 Repeat 1-2 to right. 
 5- 8 Repeat 1-4, but finish with two stamps. 
 9-16 Repeat 1-8. 
 
 Part VI. 
 1-16 Repeat Part I. 
 
 (Printed by permission of the publisher, John Jos. McVey, Philadelphia, Pa.) 
 
 POLKA BOHEME. 
 
 Music: ''Polka Boheme," by Ruhenstein. 
 
 Formation: Solo dance, individuals in front line formation six feet apart. 
 
 Counts : I. 
 
 1- 2 Polka sideways right, arms lateral left. 
 3- 4 Polka sideways left, arms lateral right. 
 5- 6 Polka sideways right, arms lateral left. 
 
 7- 8 Tour de' Basque (pirouette, turning left) left, arms in 5th position. 
 Altogether four times, alternating. 
 
 II. 
 
 1 With a hop on the left foot place right heel forward, arms lateral left, 
 
 bend forward look at right toe. 
 
 2 With a hop on the left foot place right toe in 4th behind, arms in 2nd 
 
 position, look at toe over left shoulder. 
 3- 4 One polka step forward, beginning right foot, arms in 2nd position. 
 Altogether four times, alternating. 
 
 III. 
 
 1-4 One three-step turn to the right (step sideways right; turn and step 
 left; turn and step right), and raise left leg forward with a hop on 
 the right foot. Arms in 2nd position, for three counts and lateral 
 right on the 4th count. 
 
 5- 6 Three polka step sideways left, arms in lateral right. 
 
 7- 8 Three polka step sideways right, arms in lateral left. 
 Altogether four times, alternating. 
 
 IV. 
 
 1- 2 Step sideways right, place left toe behind right and bend the right knee 
 
 and the body to the right, arms lateral right. 
 3-4 Same as 1-2, but reversed. 
 5- 6 One polka step backward right, left arm in 5th position, right hand at 
 
 waist looking over the right shoulder. 
 7- 8 Same as 5-6, but reversed. 
 
 Repeat 1-8 once more same way. 
 
 V. 
 
 1- 2 Step forward on the right foot and hop, raising the left leg forward, 
 
 arms in 2nd position on the 1st count and lateral right on 2nd. 
 5- 8 One glide polka sideways right, arms 2nd position. 
 Altogether four times, alternating. 
 
45 
 
 VI. 
 
 1- 4 Step sideways right, place left toe behind right heel and bend both 
 knees, arms from 2nd to low 1st positions, bending body forward, 
 straighten body, raise arms to salutation, bend body to the right. 
 5- 8 Same as 1-4, but reversed. 
 9-10 Polka sideways right, arms lateral left. 
 11-12 Polka sideways left, arms lateral right. 
 
 13-16 Tour de Basque right, arms 5th position and hold in salutation. 
 No repeat. 
 See " Explanation of Technical Terms " and " Glossary," page 27. 
 
 AUTUMN LEAVES. 
 
 Music: " False Lente," from Coppelia. 
 
 Formation: Solo dance; individuals in front line formation six feet apart. 
 
 Measures. 1. 
 
 1- 2 Two slides sideways right, arms second position. 
 3- 4 Step sideways right and courtesy, arms lateral right. 
 5- 6 Step sideways left and courtesy, arms lateral left. 
 7- 8 Step sideways right and courtesy, arms lateral right. 
 Four times, alternating. 
 
 2. 
 
 1- 2 Pas de Cisseaux forward right (right toe at left toe — ^bend left knee^ 
 arms from first to second position ; extend right leg forward, arms in 
 salutation). 
 
 3- 4 Repeat 1-2. 
 
 5- 7 Three walking steps forward (right, left, right), arms second. 
 
 8 Point left toe in second, arms lateral right. 
 
 All 4 times, alternating. 
 
 3. 
 
 1- 2 Two slides. 
 
 1- 2 Two slides backward right, arms lateral right. 
 
 3- 4 Two slides backward left, arms lateral left. 
 
 5- 6 Step sideways right and place left toe behind right and bend arms lateral 
 right. 
 
 7- 8 Same as 5-6 reversed, all 4 times, alternating. 
 
 4. 
 1- 2 Arabesque diagonally forward right, arms in right third. 
 
 3 Step sideways left, arms second. 
 
 4 Step right behind left, arms second, all 4 times alternating. 
 
 5. 
 1-2-3-4 Three steps turning right about (right, left, right). A three-step turn,, 
 arms second and extend left leg forward with a hop on right foot. 
 5- 6 Arabesque diagonally forward right on left foot and hop, arms in left 
 
 third. 
 7- 8 Step back on right foot and hop, raising left leg forward, arms lateral 
 right. 
 Repeat 4 times, alternating. 
 
 6. 
 1- 2 Step sideways right turning right and extending left leg forward with 
 
 hop, arms second to lateral right. 
 3- 4 Cross left over right and finish turn to right, with a Tour de Basque,. 
 
 arms first. 
 5- 8 Step sideways right, step left in rear of right. 
 Step sideways right and point left in fourth. 
 Arms second on 5-7 and lateral on 8. 
 All 4 times, alternating. 
 
46 
 
 7. 
 
 Repeat first step, finishing with a Tour de Basque left, and arms saluta- 
 tion instead of last two step courtesies. 
 
 See "Explanation of Technical Terms," and " Glossary," page 27. 
 
 VANITY SCHOTTISCHE. 
 
 By L. S. Hill, Albany, N. Y. 
 
 Music: " Vanity!' 
 
 Formation: A column of front couples, or in double circle formation partners 
 {numbered one and two, number one standing to the left of number two 
 {number one representing the gentleman, number two the lady). The 
 right hands are grasped over number two's right shoulder, the left hands 
 are grasped in front of the body. Both partners begin with the left foot. 
 
 Part I. 
 Measure. 
 
 2 Two slow steps forward; turn right about; four running steps forward, 
 
 beginning left foot. 
 2 Two slow steps backward; turn left about; four running steps forward, 
 
 beginning left foot. 
 4 Repeat all. 
 
 Part II. 
 
 2 Step left, swing right across in front; step right, swing left across in 
 front. Three running steps forward beginning left foot, and swing 
 right across in front. 
 
 2 Same right. 
 
 4 Repeat all. 
 
 Part III. 
 
 2 Two slides to left and caprice step left. Glisse (slide), Coupe (cut), 
 
 Jete (leap). Saute (hop). 
 2 Same right. 
 4 Repeat all. 
 
 Part IV. 
 
 1 Step left sideward, right in rear, step left sideward, swing right across 
 in front. 
 
 1 Same right. 
 
 Part V. 
 
 2 Step left, swing right ; step right, swing left ; same left and right. 
 Repeat dance from beginning. 
 
 MOONLIGHT CAPRICE. 
 
 Measure. 
 
 1 Caprice step, right, left, right, and Tour de Basque. 4 measures. 16 
 
 measures in all. 
 Repeat left, right, left. 
 
 2 2 caprice steps forward right and left. Step back on right and hop, 
 
 left extended in raised 4th. Repeat left. Two running steps back- 
 ward right and left and assemble. 4 measures. 
 Repeat left, right, left. 
 
 3 Diagonally forward hop on right; back hop on left; forward hop on 
 
 right. Step on left, step behind on right. Forward hop diagonally on 
 left ; back hop on right Tour de Basque to left. 4 measures. 
 Repeat left, right, left. 
 
 4 Point right in 2nd, twice ; swing right behind ; step side ; step across on 
 
 right and hop, extending left in raised 2nd. Repeat left and right. 
 Step back on left and hop, right extended in raised 4th; repeat left; 
 Tour de Basque left. 8 measures. 
 Repeat left, right, left. 
 
47 
 
 5 Turning caprice step right. Caprice step left and right and Tour de 
 Basque left. 4 measures. 
 Repeat left, right, left. 
 
 Caprice Step — 1, glide Glisse. 
 
 2, cut, Coupe. 
 
 3, leap or step, Jete. 
 
 4, hop. Saute. 
 
 See " Explanation of Technical Terms," and " Glossary," page 27. 
 
 CSARDAS, NO. 2, OR HUNGARIAN SOLO. 
 
 I. 
 
 Measure. 
 1- 7 Arms folded, elbows shoulder high. Toe and heel, beginning by touch- 
 ing right toe first — same step as in Part III, Csardas, No. 1. (28 
 counts.) 
 8 Hop on left foot and touch the right toe directly in front of the left 
 
 (count 1), change position of feet (count 2), change again (count 3), 
 pause in this position (count 4). 
 
 II. 
 
 1- 7 Slide right foot to the side (count 1) ; bring left to right and immediately 
 transfer the weight to the left, extending the righ^ to the side (count 2), 
 bring the right foot to the left (count " and ") ; same opposite side 
 (counts 3-4 and). Continue this step, alternating right and left. (28 
 counts.) 
 
 8 Finish with same step as for measure 8, of I. 
 
 III. 
 1- 7 Touch right toe to side (count 1) ; reverse position of foot so that heel 
 touches (count 2) ; 'touch right toe directly in front of left toe 
 (count 3) ; extend right foot diagonally forward (count 4). Hop on 
 left foot on each count when executing movements with the right. 
 Right hand should be at the waist and left arm curved diagonally 
 upward. (One measure.) 
 Repeat same to left. Continue alternating right and left. (28 counts.) 
 8 Finish with same step as for measure 8, of I. 
 
 IV. 
 
 1 Arms folded. Slide right foot to side (count 1) ; bring left to right, 
 
 immediately transferring the weight to the left and extending right 
 leg to side (count 2) ; raise right foot to left knee and hop on left foot 
 (count "and") ; repeat the same (counts 3-4 and). 
 
 2 Hop on right foot and at the same time touch left toe directly in front 
 
 of the right toe (count 1) ; change position of feet (count 2) ; pause 
 (count 4) ; raise left foot to right knee (count "and"). 
 
 3 Same step as first measure, but moving to the left. 
 
 4 Same as second measure, but beginning with other foot. 
 5- 8 Repeat all. 
 
 V. 
 
 1 Stamp right foot (one), stamp left foot ("and"), stamp right foot 
 
 (two), pause ("and") ; repeat (3, and, 4, and). While making these 
 six stamps turn once around to the right in place. 
 
 2 Hop on right foot, touch left toe in front of right toe (count 1) ; change 
 
 position of feet (count 2); change (count 3); pause (count 4). 
 
 3 Same as first measure, but begin with the left foot and turn to left. 
 
 4 Same as second measure, but begin with other foot. 
 5- 8 Repeat all. 
 
48 
 
 VI. 
 
 1 With right foot raised to the side, hop on the left foot and at the same 
 
 time strike the right heel sharply against the left heel (count 1) ; 
 repeat (count 2). In making these two hops move to the right. Make 
 a long step sideward with right foot (count 3) ; with left foot step 
 across behind the right foot (count 4). 
 
 2 Same as measure 1. 
 
 3 Touch the right toe to the side, with the foot turned so that the heel is 
 
 high (count 1) ; reverse the position of the foot and touch the heel 
 in the same spot (count 2) ; touch the left toe to the side, heel high 
 (count 3) ; touch left heel in the same spot (count 4). Hop on each 
 count, first two counts on the left foot, last two on right foot. 
 
 4 Same as measure 2, of V. 
 
 5- 8 Repeat all, beginning with the other foot and moving toward the left. 
 
 VII. 
 1- 8 Same as V, but this time the music is played very rapidly and the turns, 
 are made correspondingly fast. The whole dance, should have military 
 dash and precision. The head high and well back, and arms folded 
 high. 
 
 DUTCH DANCE — "HEINIE." 
 
 Music: "Mr. Stein/' "Oh, Where! Oh, Where! Has My Little Dog Gone?'" 
 
 and " Heinie." 
 
 Formation: A Front and a rear Rank. 
 
 1. 
 
 Stamp left sideways. Strike right foot in front of left. Hop on left foot. 
 1-2-3. 
 
 Stamp right sideways. Strike left foot in front of right. Hop on right 
 foot. 4-5-6. 
 
 Stamp left sideways. Strike right foot in front of left. Hop on left foot 
 and stamp right, 1-6. 
 
 Repeat, starting right. Repeat, starting left and right. 
 
 2. 
 
 Spring on to right foot, raising left behind it. 1-2-3. 
 
 Spring on to left foot, raising right behind it. 4-5-6. 
 
 Spring on to toes, turned in. 1-2-3. 
 
 Spring on to heels, toes turned out. 4-5-6. 
 
 Repeat four times. (Finish with 3 jumps, on both feet.) 
 
 3. 
 
 Twist and kick left and right. 1-6. (Volkes — twist.) 
 Twist and kick left, toes touch floor and kick. 1-6. 
 -Repeat, starting to right. 
 Repeat, starting to left. (Finish with 3 jumps on both feet.) 
 
 4. 
 Cross left over in front of right, swing right to side and hit with leftr 
 repeat right ; alternate during phrase, finishing with three stamps. 
 
 5. 
 Front Rank. 
 Step to left. Strike left heel with right foot. Step on right behind left 
 foot. Repeat three times. Finish with stamp of right foot sideways right. Re- 
 peat to right side. 
 
 Rear rank just opposite. Repeat the whole dance, rear rank taking hands of 
 boys in front over shoulders, all moving to left. 
 
 In finishing front rank continue off count, taking step to left. Rear rank 
 same, but to right. 
 
49 
 
 GYMNASTIC DAYS' ORDER AND PROGRESSION. 
 
 1 Order or Introduction : Transition from mental to physical activity. 
 
 2 Leg movements : Relief to the brain and other oppressed organs. 
 
 3 Arch movements : To cultivate extensibility of the expiratory muscles. 
 
 4 Arm movements : To cultivate contractility of the inspiratory muscles ; 
 
 to elevate the chest. To increase the skill of the hands. 
 
 5 Balance movements : To cultivate equilibrium in the ordinary positions 
 
 and correct the general posture. 
 
 6 Back movements : To strengthen the muscles of the back. 
 
 7 Front movements : To improve digestion and support viscera. 
 
 8 Side movements : To affect large vessels and develop waist muscles. 
 
 9 Jumping movements : Develop general co-ordination, control and speed. 
 
 10 Slow-leg movements : Diminish arterial pressure. Equalize circulation. 
 
 Prepare body for rest. 
 
 11 Respiratory movements: Produce normal respiration. Remove venous 
 
 congestion. 
 
 Executive words that are used most frequently are : Attention ! 
 Position ! Dress ! Front ! Face ! March ! Halt ! Close ! Open ! Place ! Fall 
 Out ! Raise ! Fling ! Sink ! Bend ! Stretch ! Circling ! Rotate ! Twist ! Jump ! 
 Rest! 
 
 BREATHING EXERCISES. 
 
 To derive the greatest benefit from these exercises, breathe air as pure as 
 possible. Never give these exercises when the air has been overfilled with 
 particles of dust. Deep breathing is given for manifold reasons, the following 
 of which may be named as the most important : 
 
 To develop those muscles which assist directly in breathing, to develop the 
 diaphragm and intercostal muscles, to preserve and increase the elasticity of the 
 lungs and thorax, to expand the chest, to increase the lung capacity, to produce 
 stronger and deeper respiration and to stimulate the circulation. 
 
 The breathing exercises should consist of long deep inhalations, thoroughly 
 expanding the chest and filling all parts of the lungs. It is especially desirable 
 that the apexes be inflated, by forcing the air to the upper parts of the lungs. 
 
 The exhalations should be somewhat forced, so as to expel as much of the 
 residual air as possible. Arm movements which act on the muscles of respira- 
 tion may be added to the breathing, as they greatly enhance the effect. 
 
 ROUTINE FOR BEGINNING AND CLOSING THE LESSON. 
 
 Cornmand : Prepare for exercise ! 
 
 Pupils arrange their desks, and sit erect, hands on desk, shoulders back, 
 without touching the back of seat, head up, chin drawn in, heels together. 
 
 Attention ! Hands are clasped on the edge of the desk. 
 
 Hands in lap — place ! Hands are clasped in the lap. 
 
 In seats — rest ! In the first three grades the arms are placed on the desks 
 and the body is brought forward, the whole body is completely relaxed. In 
 the upper grades the hands are placed in the lap or at the sides, and the 
 pupil should relax against the back of the seat. 
 
 GRADES I, 2 AND 3, RISING EXERCISES. 
 
 Left (or right) hand — on desk — place! One! (Lower right or left-hand 
 corner.) 
 
 To the right (or left)— turn! Two! 
 
 Stand ! Three ! 
 
 Left (or right) — face! Four! 
 
 Grades 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. : 
 
50 
 
 FOR RISING EXERCISES IN GRADES 4, 5, 6, 7 AND 8. 
 
 The boys will occupy the first aisle; girls the second, boys the third, etc. 
 
 Hand on desk-place! Boys in aisles 1, 3, 5, etc., will place left hand at 
 lower right-hand corner or desk, while boys in aisles 2, 4, 6, etc., will place their 
 right hands at left corner. Girls in aisles 1, 3, 5, etc., will place right hand at 
 left-hand corner, while girls in aisles 2, 4, 5, etc., will place their left hand at 
 right corner. 
 
 On count 2, scholars will turn to their respective aisles. 
 
 On count 3, stand ! In case two scholars are directly in front of each other 
 the shorter one steps forward. 
 
 To the front — face ! 
 
 Forward — dress ! Position ! 
 
 AT THE CLOSE OF THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Ready for sitting — face ! Pupils will face with back to chair. 
 
 On count 2, scholars sit. 
 
 On count 3, scholars turn toward the front of room. 
 
 Command — Seats — raise. 1-2-3. On 1, pupils bend forward and take hold 
 of seats ; 2, straighten up and lift the seats ; 3, stand attention. 
 
 Command — For marching — About — face ! Pupils in alternate rows face to 
 the rear, turning right about. 
 
 Command — To your seats^march ! Pupils march to their seats and stand 
 in the direction they were marching. 
 
 • Command^Alternate rows right (or left) — about — face! 
 
 VALUE OF PLAY. 
 
 It is of the greatest importance that games should be played frequently. 
 From an educational standpoint, their greatest value lies in the fact that if 
 rightly conducted, they awaken and strengthen the high moral qualities of 
 fairness, cottrage, determination, steadfastness and presence of mind. They 
 give energy, decision and promptness to the will. In short, by training not 
 only the physical and mental, but also the moral, powers ; games are of very 
 great service in cultivating the civic virtues which are so essential and necessary 
 for the life and welfare of the individual and of the community. 
 
 GAMES. 
 
 Games are rightly -classed among the recreative exercises and should be 
 practiced more frequently than at present. They are not only selected for the 
 pleasure they afford, but also for the purpose of developing the powers of 
 observation and attention, the senses, agility, individuality and comprehension. 
 
 Principals and teachers should encourage out-of-door play as much as 
 possible. The boys should be encouraged to practice the high and broad jumps 
 and the sprint. They should be taught not to look upon these exercises only as 
 preparatory work for the field day and the contests, but also as an enjoyment 
 and as a beneficial exercise. " Captain Ball " and " Dodge Ball " are excellent 
 games for boys and girls. Especially the latter can be played anywhere without 
 preparation of the grounds, and it is, for this reason, and also because so 
 many pupils can take part at one time, an excellent game during recess. 
 
 PLAY EXERCISES AND SCHOOL-ROOM GAMES. 
 
 Bean Bags. 
 
 Use Eraser or Book if you have no Bean Bags. 
 
 ■ 1 Pass Bean Bags backward over the heads and return, children sitting; 
 
 children standing. 
 2 Pass Bean Bags backward at the left side and return ; the same at the 
 
 right side. 
 
51 
 
 3 Pass Bean Bags from left to right and return. Children sitting; children 
 
 standing. 
 
 4 Tossing Bean Bags: Children standing opposite each other toss the 
 
 bag with both hands and catch with both. Tossing with the right 
 hand and catching with the right; same left, holding idle hand behind 
 the back. 
 
 5 Tossing Bean Bags into Rings: These rings are made with chalk on 
 
 the floor, one inside of the other — eight, sixteen, and twenty-four 
 inches in diameter. At a certain distance each child tosses the bag 
 into the rings; if it comes into the smallest one' it counts 20; within the 
 second ring 10; and within the largest 5. Rings should be made in 
 front of each aisle, 
 
 6 Bean Bag Races: (a) Place some bags at even distances in front of 
 
 each aisle and let the first line of children run and pick them up and 
 carry them back to the desk. Each line the same. Announce the 
 winner and score that aisle 5 points, 
 (b) The first child in each section, with the bag in the left hand, stands 
 in the right aisle', facing the rear wall. At a given signal they run 
 back, touch the wall, return down the same aisle, giving the bag to the 
 second, who starts off quickly, and gives it to the third, etc., etc. 
 When the last one gets it, he touches the wall and runs to the front, 
 giving it to the first. 
 
 Since each section is playing independently, the line getting the bag to 
 the front desk first wans. 
 
 A similar relay race may be run instead of touching the wall, each 
 child running down the right aisle, around the last seat, and up the 
 left aisle. In this race alternate rows only should play. 
 
 7 Throw Bean Bags into a basket. 
 
 IMAGINARY PLAYS. 
 
 1. Snowing: Stretch the arms as high over the head as possible and then 
 shake them quickly as they are lowered down to the floor. 
 
 2. Shoveling Snow: Place left foot forward, hold the shovel with left 
 hand in front and imitate shoveling snow; then reverse position. 
 
 3. Throzv Snow Ball: 1. Stoop down and gather snow. On 2, squeeze it 
 hard with both hands and make a good ball. 3. Throw it with the right and 
 left hand alternately. 
 
 4. Warm the Hands and Feet: 1. Rub the' hands quickly against each 
 other. 2. Clap the hands in rhythm with music. 3. Stamp in rhythm with music. 
 4. Lift the feet quickly backward as if running. 
 
 5. Warm the Body: The children throw their arms quickly around their 
 chest in rapid succession. 
 
 6. Pick Apples: Raise high on tiptoes; stretch right arm high and bend 
 head backward; pick the apple; lower the heels and bring the right hand down 
 across the chest to an imaginary basket in the left. Repeat and reverse. 
 
 7. Climb Rope: Raise right hand high up with the head well back; pull 
 the right hand down and raise the left and continue imaginary climbing up 
 rope. 
 
 8. Shoot with Bow and Arrow: On one, stand with the left foot forward, 
 and both hands in front of face, the left hand grasping the bow and the right 
 the string; pull right arm backward and push the left forward with a good 
 steady motion, on two; then suddenly let go, coming to the fundamental 
 position, on three. Repeat several times, and reverse. 
 
 9. Throw the Lasso and Pull in: On one, stand with left foot in front, 
 hold the coil of rope in the left hand and the loop in the right; swing the loop 
 around the head four times (four counts), then quickly throw with the right 
 hand, on six, and pull in with both hands, on seven, eight, nine and ten. Repeat 
 and reverse. Take to ten counts. 
 
 10. Pitch and Bat a Ball: With right and left hand. 
 
11. Saw Wood: Children facing their chairs put one foot in it, imitate 
 holding onto the saw with both hands, and saw. Reverse. 
 
 12. Splitting Wood: Feet sideward place and both hands clasped over the 
 left shoulder; bend the body forward and bring the hands quickly and firmly 
 down in front. Repeat in quick succession and reverse. 
 
 13. Play Golf: With the left foot forward and the arms over the right 
 shoulder imitate hitting the ball, making a full swing of arms down and way 
 up to the left side, raising the right heel ; then reverse. 
 
 14. Swimming: Place left foot forward; bend the arms in front of the 
 chest with the fingers pointed forward ; stretch the arms forward and bend the 
 left knee and the trunk forward with the head well back ; raise the trunk and 
 bring the arms out sideways, straighten the left knee and bend the right. 
 Reverse feet. (Count: one! two! and three!) 
 
 15. Shot Put: In four counts — On one, left foot forward, left knee 
 straight and right knee well bent, left arm stretched forward and right arm 
 sharply bent at the side with the hand at the side of the right shoulder ; 
 two, push the right hand vigorously forward and bring the left arm down and 
 backward, stretch the right knee and bend the left, and carry the weight of the 
 body forward ; three, same as one ; four, come to fundamental position. 
 Reverse it. 
 
 RUNNING AND JUMPING. 
 
 1. Place two light boxes on the floor, and across these a stick. The class 
 stands in position. The pupils, by sections or rows, start to run around the 
 room, jumping over the sticks with the left, right, or both feet, returning to 
 their desks. 
 
 2. Place eight or ten erasers on the floor, about 12 or 16 inches apart. 
 Each child in turn passes to the erasers, hops over them on one foot without 
 lowering the other, and returns to his desk. The game may be a contest, the 
 successful ones remaining in the game, the last one up being the winner. 
 
 3. Stand against the rear wall, run to the front wall blackboard, write a 
 certain number or word and return to the seat. 
 
 FOLLOW MY LEADER. 
 
 A leader is chosen, the class march around the room, imitating him. He 
 may take arm movements, clapping hands, etc. The changes occur quickly, and 
 inattention sends a child to his seat. 
 
 BOOK ON HEAD. 
 
 The class standing, with correct position of head and a book on the same, 
 walks around the room in order. The line returning with the largest number 
 of books in place (without having touched them) is the winner. 
 
 BIRDS FLY. 
 
 Each section assumes the name of a bird. When the teacher calls for one — 
 say a robin^the robins fly around the room. This continues until all have 
 been out. 
 
 TREES IN A STORM. 
 
 The class stands, each representing a good, strong, tall tree, with strong 
 branches (arms sideward), twigs (the fingers). Finally the little twigs move; 
 next, the top of the tree (head), then the branches move up and down; now, 
 the whole tree is bending (trunk bending and turning). 
 
 During all this time the wind has been blowing and getting louder (inhale 
 through the nostrils and exhale through the partly open lips). 
 
 Finally the wind is more gentle, and the' movements gradually stop in turn, 
 ending with the little movements of the twigs. 
 
53 
 
 OUT-OF-DOOR GAMES. 
 
 Touch. 
 
 The players form a circle and grasp hands, one of the players running 
 around the outside, touches another, who immediately runs in the direction just 
 opposite, the place remaining vacant until one or the other returns. The last 
 one returning continues the game. 
 
 This may ht varied by two runners grasping hands on meeting each other 
 and making a complete turn around each other, then running on again. 
 
 Cat and Mouse. 
 
 Arrange players in a circle with hands grasped. One pupil is selected to 
 be the cat, another to be the mouse. The former stands outside the circle, the 
 latter inside. One says, "I am the cat;" the other, "I am the mouse." The 
 cat, " I will catch you ; " the mouse, " You can't do it." Whereupon both run, 
 the cat trying to catch the mouse'. The players forming the circle protect the 
 mouse by letting it run in and out under the grasped hands, and stopping the 
 cat whenever possible. 
 
 If the cat is too slow for the mouse, the players raise the hands, and the' 
 cat may run under at will until the mouse is caught. 
 
 Breaking the ring or squatting on the ground must not be permitted. 
 
 Flank Tag. 
 
 Players (10-50) form in front rank, count off by fours, fours quarter 
 wheel right, join hands and spread out, forming lanes between each rank of 
 fours. One player is " It " and chases another through these lanes, but on signal 
 from the umpire (by command or whistle) the fours release hands, right face 
 and join hands in the new direction with adjacent fours, thus making new lanes 
 for " It " and the one chased, who may not dodge under joined hands. When 
 the chase is tagged they (or the umpire) select players who exchange places 
 with them and the game continues. One whistle may indicate right face ; two 
 blasts, left face; three, about face, and should be given at opportune moments 
 to shorten or prolong the chase. 
 
 Link Tag (Red Line, Red Lion, Link Chase). 
 
 Players, 8-25. A home base is marked out (shot circle in gymnasium) 
 from which " It " runs out (with fingers locked) and attempts to tag players 
 who run about within a certain boundary. Anyone whom he tags must return 
 home with him and they start out again hand in hand to catch a third. Only 
 one may be caught by each free hand on each trip from home and as the line 
 grows longer the latest one caught takes the end of the' line and has one free 
 hand to tag those not caught. He may change hands, but the object of those 
 chased is to break the line of joined hands by running through the center 
 after which they may tag anyone of line who then becomes a horse and must 
 return to that spot and carry his captor towards home. If he succeeds in 
 carrying him into home, however, the rider is caught; therefore the riders 
 stay on the horses' backs as long as they dare before dismounting. (It is con- 
 sidered a dismount if the rider touches the ground.) Girls should omit the 
 riding but may drive the broken line players home by slaps on their backs with 
 handkerchiefs. 
 
DoDGS Ball. 
 
 Players (20-60) divide equally, one side taking the centre of the floor 
 while the opponents, equally distant, form on a marked circle about them or m 
 touch with the four gymnasium walls. The circle players have a basket ball 
 which they throw at the inner group; any one of whom is touched leaves the 
 center and joins the circle throwers. The player who stays longest without 
 being touched by the ball wins. The sides may play a time game, in A)\rhich all 
 players hit become spectators until their side has its turn at throwing. With 
 active playing two balls may be used when only a few remain in the center. 
 Throwers must have one foot touching wall or boundary when throwing the 
 ball and, when necessary to leave boundary to secure ball, it must be passed 
 to a circle player to '' put in play." 
 
 Divide the players into teams. 
 
 Double Dodgeball. 
 
 A very strenuous game in which the defending team seldom lasts long is 
 the regular game of dodgeball played with two balls. To pick the winnmg 
 team the game must be timed, the team, staying in the circle longest winning 
 the game. 
 
 Capta'in Dodgeball. 
 
 The object of the game is for the players on team A to hit the members 
 of the opposing team B with a large hollow ball (basket ball), except as noted 
 
 Team A is placed on the outer side of the 
 circle, which should be drawn from 40 
 to 50 feet in diameter. (See diagram.) 
 The members of team B are scattered 
 around the inside of the circle, their 
 captain being in the small circle in the 
 center. This circle is 5 feet in diameter. 
 To start the game the referee blows 
 the whistle, at the same time tossing the 
 ball to one of the players on team A. 
 The players on team B defend their 
 captain by trying to intercept the thrown 
 ball. This may only be done by raising 
 one's foot so that the ball rebounds 
 from the sole. (Warding off the ball 
 with the forearm may also be used.) 
 If the ball touches any other part of the 
 body of a player on team B he is out 
 and leaves the circle. If the captain is 
 struck (who may not leave the circle) 
 he remains in the game, but the captain of team A has the right to pick two 
 players of team B and put them out. Members of the attacking team must 
 always stand behind the line when throwing. Should a ball roll into the 
 field of play, a player of team A may run in and toss the ball to one of his 
 team-mates. 
 
 At the end of three minutes (or any specified time) count the number of 
 players remaining on team B and credit them with so many points. The sides 
 are then changed for second half. 
 
Run Dodgeball. 
 
 The object of the game is for the players on team B to run across the 
 field to the other end without being hit by the ball (a basket ball) during 
 their run. 
 
 Divide the players with two teams, A and B. The players on team A are 
 again divided, one-half standing on either side of the play-field. {See diagram.) 
 All the players on team B are at one end of the short end of the field. The 
 
 field is approximately 30 by 60 feet. 
 
 To start the game the referee tosses the ball to 
 one of the players on team A, at the same time 
 blowing his whistle as a signal for the players on 
 team B that they may run. Upon this the player of 
 team A who has the ball throws at the runners. 
 Those who are hit are out. When all of the un- 
 touched runners are ^over at B the referee again 
 gives the signal to run. The throwers must always 
 stand behind their line when throwing at a runner. 
 Should the ball roll into the field a player from 
 team A may run in and toss it to one of his team- 
 mates. Only the runners in the field of play may be 
 thrown at. At the end of three minutes (or any 
 other specified time) count the number of players 
 left on team B and credit them with so many points. 
 The teams then exchange places and activities. The 
 team having the greatest number of points at the 
 end of the game wins. 
 
 
 ft t^ A ft ft 
 
 
 
 
 J^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 >- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -T 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 < 
 
 2_04d- 
 
 
 Base Dodgeball. 
 
 The following form of " Dodgeball " seems to have descended from the 
 game of " Bull Pen." The game is played as follows : Place as many small 
 circles (2 ft. in diameter) around the periphery of a small circle- leaving a 
 diameter of 45 or 50 feet. The players of one team, the drivers, occupy the 
 bases, and a like number of players are the bulls who roam about the inside 
 pen (the large circle). An indoor base ball is used. The ball must always 
 pass through the hands of three basemen (drivers) before it may be thrown 
 at a bull. If the bull i& hit he is out of the game. If, however, the bull 
 catches the ball he may, from where he caught the ball, throw this at a driver 
 who may not leave his base. If the driver is hit, he is out of the game. 
 Should he, however, catch the ball, he keeps his place and again startes the 
 game by throwing the ball to one of his team-mates. If one or more drivers 
 are put out of the game the other basemen may run and occupy the empty 
 bases. 
 
 After playing five minutes (or any other specified time) count the number 
 of players left on each team, and then change places. At the end of the second 
 half again count players. The side having the greater number is the winner. 
 
56 
 
 End Ball. 
 
 The field is a 30-foot square divided into two 
 outside end of each field is a smaller field or base 
 diagram.) 
 
 equal parts. Across the 
 3 or 4 feet deep. (See 
 
 Any number may play. They 
 are divided into two teams. About 
 one-third of each team are base- 
 men, who take their places in the 
 base or outer field at one end, 
 while the others are guards, and 
 take their places in the inner field 
 on the opposite side of the center 
 line. 
 
 The game may be played in 
 halves of five minutes or for any 
 length of time. Play is continuous 
 during this time. A point is made 
 whenever a baseman catches the 
 ball (basket ball) from a guard of 
 his own team. 
 
 Rules. 
 The game is in charge of a 
 referee, who calls all fouls. At 
 the beginning of the game (or at 
 the beginning of each half) he 
 tosses the ball up in the center be- 
 tween two opposing guards. 
 
 All players must keep within 
 their own fields. Basemen must 
 always have both feet in the base 
 (he may jump up and catch the 
 ball). If the ball rolls or is 
 thrown over the boundary line of any field, the player nearest the line in that 
 field gets the ball, and brings it in to the line, at the point where it crossed. 
 From there he throws the ball to one of the players in the same field. In case 
 of a foul the ball is given to a guard on the opposite side. 
 
 ^U^ o^.^ 
 
57 
 
 Corner Ball. 
 
 The field is an oblong. 30 feet by 40 feet, divided into two equal parts. 
 (Any space may be used if this size is not available.) Each part contains two 
 
 bases, placed in the far corner 
 diagram.) 
 
 A third may be added if desired. (See 
 
 'si^Jr^: 
 
 Any number may play. They are 
 divided into two teams. Two players of 
 each team are basemen and the others are 
 guards. Their positions are shown in the 
 diagrams. The bases are three feet square. 
 The object of the game is to throw the ball 
 from a guard to a baseman of the same 
 team. 
 
 The game is played in halves of five (5) 
 or more minutes each. Play is continuous 
 during this time, the only stop being that 
 made to call a foul. 
 
 A point is made whenever a baseman 
 catches a ball from one of the guards of 
 his own team. It must be a fair throw, 
 that is, the ball must not touch the ground, 
 wall or ceiling before being caught by the 
 baseman. 
 ^__^ Rules. 
 
 \V3 Guards are not allowed to cross center 
 
 .line nor to step into the bases, nor out of 
 the 'field of play. 
 
 Basemen must always have both feet in their bases, but they are allowed 
 to jump up to catch the ball. 
 
 The game is in charge of a referee who calls the fouls. At the beginning 
 of each half he tosses the ball up in the center of the field, between two 
 opposing guards. In case of a foul he gives the ball to a guard of the other 
 team. There shall be a scorer, who is also timekeeper. 
 
 If in the course of play the ball rolls or is thrown oflf the field, it shall be 
 brought back by a guard of the team whose line it crossed. He shall put the 
 ball in play by standing on the line at the place where the ball left the field, 
 and throwing it to one of the guards of his own team. Fouls are made as 
 follows : 
 
 1. Carrying the ball (taking more than one step). 
 
 2. Striking or touching the ball when it is in the hands of a player. 
 
 3. Holding, pushing, striking,, or tripping an opponent. 
 
 4. Stepping across the center line, or out of the field, with one or both 
 feet, or on the bases of the opponents. 
 
 5. When a baseman steps out of the base with one or both feet. 
 
58 
 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 13 
 
 ® 
 
 5 
 
 B 
 
 ® 
 
 
 (A) 
 
 »5 
 
 A 
 
 
 A 
 
 (g) 
 
 A- 
 
 ® 
 
 @ 
 
 4 
 
 , 
 
 A^ 
 
 ® 
 
 f— If 
 
 (g) 
 
 Captain Ball. 
 
 Players. — Diagram illustrates ten players on a side. There may be more 
 or less. 
 
 Field. — For twenty players, 50 or 60 feet long, divided by a line if indoors. 
 
 Circles. — Five circles in each half 
 of field, 3 feet in diameter, center 
 circle 4 or 5 feet in diameter, being 
 occupied by the Captain, 
 
 Position of Teams. — A's are all on 
 one team (on diagram) and the B's on 
 the other. Five of A's are in circles 
 and the other five guard the B's. Each 
 A circle is guarded by a B. 
 
 The Game. — The game is started 
 by the two guards of the Captain's 
 circles standing astride the center line 
 and having the ball thrown between 
 them. Each tries to bat it to one of 
 his own players. The object is to get 
 the ball to the Captain, but it must 
 come from one of the side circles to 
 count a point. For instance, if one of 
 the A's guarding a B circle should get 
 the ball, he must not throw directly to 
 his (A's) Captain but to one of the side 
 circles, who will then try to throw to 
 the Captain in the center, thus scoring 
 
 ^^^L/gX^-t <'Q>-<lJCi Another way of scoring a point is 
 
 ' by making a circuit of the circles with 
 
 the ball. If A in circle gets the ball, he can throw to 2, and 2 to 3, and 3 to 4, 
 thus scoring a point. 
 
 The circle players must not step out of the circle, nor may the guards 
 step into the circle. The ball must not be kicked, nor may a player take any 
 steps after catching it. An infringement of the rules gives the ball to the 
 Captain's guard of the opposing side. The guards may run where they please to 
 guard or get the ball, and may advance it to the line by passing as in basket 
 ball, though they must not step over the line. 
 
 Time. — The game should be played in two halves of five minutes each, or 
 in four quarters of five minutes each without any rest between. At the end 
 of each quarter the guards play in the circles and the circle- players get the 
 more exercise of guarding. 
 
 Variation. — Circle players may be allowed to step one foot out of circle. 
 
 Captain may be placed on a spring board, the elevation gives him an 
 advantage in catching the ball. 
 
 Relay Races. 
 Shuttle Relay. — Players may be 6, 8 or more on a 
 side. Diagram represents 4 A's in flank column facing 
 4 A's also in flank column. B's position is the same. 
 The game is a race between A's team and B's. The first 
 one back in his original position wins the game for 
 his team. 
 
 At the word "go," or whistle, captain A and B run 
 and tag first one on the opposite side (they take place in 
 rear). The one tagged runs in turn to second one on 
 opposite side. The second one runs to third one on 
 the opposite side. This continues until all are back in 
 the original places. 
 The distance between should be not less than 20 feet. A flag, handkerchief 
 or bean bag may be given instead of tagging. 
 
 Capt. 
 
 A 
 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 1. 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 Capt. 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 2 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 
 B 
 
A 
 
 J. lie 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 ! 
 
 ! 
 
 ! 
 1 
 
 ! 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ! 
 
 ! 
 
 59 
 
 Potato Relay. — Ten potatoes, blocks of wood or dumb bell?, are placed 
 
 5 feet apart in rows from the starting line. At the signal "go" the racers 
 
 (one runner for each row of potatoes) run from the starting line and pick 
 
 up the potatoes one at a time, then returning, place them in a box or basket 
 
 back of starting line. The one getting all his potatoes into his box first wins. 
 
 12 3 4 5 Bound Ball. — Any even number of players may play. A's 
 
 A A A A A team stands facing B's team with a large basket or box in the 
 
 center. B takes a basket ball and tries to put the ball in the 
 
 basket after it has bounded on the floor once. If B succeeds it 
 
 B B B B B counts one point for his side. If, however, he does not put it 
 
 5 4 3 2 1 in A tries. If he fails B-2 takes his turn, and so on. This 
 
 game may he timed or each player having had a chance three 
 
 The ball must bound once and only once to make a point. 
 
 Snake Relay. — Any even number of players may play. 
 A's team is lined up in flank column side of B's team. In 
 front of each team at about a distance of fifteen feet are 
 placed Indian clubs, three or four feet apart. At a given 
 signal A and B run in and out around each club (without 
 knocking them down — if one is knocked down it must be set 
 upright before going on.) 
 
 Lame Fox (Punch and Judy). 
 
 Any number of players, grammar school ages. A home base (shot put 
 circle may be used) is made for the lame fox, from which he hops out into 
 the playing space attempting to tag any of the players, who tease him and 
 try to make him touch both feet to ground. If he does touch both feet to 
 ground he is driven home by claps on the back, only with the open hand when 
 boys are playing, or by knotted handkerchiefs. But if he tags any one by 
 hopping, that one becomes the fox and is chased home by all who can slap 
 him. When young children play, the fox may be allowed three steps before 
 beginning to hop and may change the hopping foot while outside of home base. 
 Two or m.ore foxes may be necessary with a large number. 
 
 Straddle Ball (Pass Ball). 
 Players form a circle facing inward and have feet straddled, touching 
 those of their two neighbors. One player in the center tries to pass a basket 
 ball out of the circle below the knees or between the feet of any player while 
 they try to prevent with their hands. The one who allows the ball to pass 
 out between his legs or on his right side must take his place in the center. 
 
 Pin Ball, 
 
 The official rules of basket ball shall be used except where differing from 
 the following special rules : 
 
 The goals shall consist of two upright bowling pins, one placed in the 
 center of each half of the playing space and each surrounded by a guard circle 
 4 feet in diameter and an outer circle 12 feet in diameter plainly painted or 
 marked on floor. A team scores two points each time the ball causes the 
 opponent's pin to fall, provided no rule be violated in the play. A thrower 
 may not advance with ball and may not score if he touches inside the 22-foot 
 outer circle during throw but, if he does and pin does not fall, ball is in play. 
 Guards may interfere to protect their pin but may not stand on or within the 
 guard circle, except at risk of being touched by ball, which scores a point for 
 opponents. Each foul, according to basket ball rules (men's or women's) 
 counts one point for opponents and game is stopped and ball brought to center 
 while point is awarded by referee. 
 
 Objects of Game. 1. To bowl over opponents' pin, scoring two points. 
 
 2. To cause opponents to touch ball while standing on or touching within 
 4-foot guard circle. 
 
 3. To keep ball out of opponents' possession by shifting positions, passing 
 ball to " free player" and observing rules. 
 
60 
 
 Ling (German Ball). 
 
 Ten to 40 players. Playing space, the gymnasium floor or in open air 
 (35'x70'), (40'x80'). Home base at one end marked by "foul line" parallel 
 with front edges of batter's boxes and ten feet from end boundary. Players 
 divide equally and fielders spread out over playing space while batters arrange 
 batting order, youngest (or shortest) to bat, first. Batter takes position in 
 either box and next youngest batter becomes the pitcher and occupies other 
 box. Being on same side, he tosses ball vertically about eight feet high to 
 allow his batter an easy strike'. Two badly tossed balls count a strike, as do the 
 first two foul strikes, the batter being out if after three strikes he fails to bat 
 the ball into fair field. After a fair hit the batter may attempt to run to first 
 base (which is the further boundary of playing space) or he may remain in 
 " home " and run on any subsequent hit made by his team-mates. The pitcher 
 becomes next batter. A score is counted whenever a base runner makes the 
 run from "home " to base and back without being tagged or struck with the 
 ball while in the fielders' space. After reaching base he may remain there in 
 safety providing he does not leave base with both feet while ball is in field. 
 After once fairly leaving a base he cannot return but must make the next base, 
 running the chance of being put out. Three outs retire the side at bat, the 
 fielders becoming batters. An out is scored whenever a batter fails to hit the 
 ball after three strikes ; or when a fair hit ball is caught on the fly before it 
 touches a, wall or ceiling or other obstruction; base runner is out if touched 
 by ball while he is in field, except that if ball be thrown he is not out if struck 
 by ball above shoulders, or if fielder advanced with ball before throwing. Base 
 runners must return to base last touched after a caught fly ball and are liable 
 to be touched or thrown out until such return. A fielder may not advance 
 with ball in making an out (must keep one foot in place) but if progress is 
 made he may toss ball to another fielder who may attempt any play. A base 
 runner may not leave base until ball is actually in playing field. When in 
 batter's space (behind foul line) base runners must have one foot behind base 
 line. The game is decided by the greatest score in any number of a'greed 
 innings or time. A fair ball is one struck by the batter which, if unobstructed, 
 will settle on fair field beyond the foul line (which extends up walls and 
 across ceiling when indoors). 
 
 Snatch the Kerchief. 
 
 Number of players, 10 to 40. Grade, Grammar. Apparatus, Indian club 
 and handkerchief. Equal sides are chosen, which form facing each other on 
 parallel goal lines about sixty feet apart. An upright club or bowling pin on 
 which is loosely hung a handkerchief is placed on a center division line. On 
 signal the right end player from each flank runs to the pin, his object being 
 to secure the handerchief without overturning the pin and return to his goal 
 before being touched by his opponent. If he succeeds his opponent drops out 
 or becomes a player in the winner's side, but if he is tagged after touching 
 kerchief or if he causes the pin to fall he loses and must fall in at left end 
 with winner. After each trial the umpire replaces handkerchief and the play 
 is repeated until all are on one side or until time is called, when the side 
 having the most players wins. Players when near pin must keep at least one 
 foot nearer than the pin is to the goal line. When neither player is willing 
 to attempt touching the kerchief the umpire restarts them after one minute. 
 
 Basket Ball Race. 
 Number of players, 10 to 60, all ages. Apparatus, two basket balls, one 
 goal. Equal sides are chosen, which form in front ranks facing each other 
 about 15 feet apart. The players at ends of lines farthest from goal each hold 
 a ball, and on signal the balls are passed through hands of each consecutive 
 player to end men nearest goal, who toss the balls through the goal. They 
 must then run with the balls to far end of the ranks and pass or throw them 
 not more than ten feet to their respective end men. They may be required to 
 try goal only three times before running unless they succeed on first or second 
 
61 
 
 attempt. Experienced players may be required to dribble the ball while running 
 to far end. The passing, goal throwing and running are repeated until all of 
 one side have made one round, thus winning the game. The ball must be 
 handled by each player when passed along the rank but a goal thrower may 
 not be assisted and others must remain at least ten feet distant from the goal. 
 Any ball passing variation may be used. 
 
 Wrestling Circle Poison. 
 
 A few upright clubs are placed within the circle of players who grasp 
 hands and on signal try to make someone upset one or more clubs by pushing 
 and pulling. Any player who knocks a pin must drop out of circle until 
 only one remains or, better, he leaves the circle until the next one drops out 
 when he may return. Various grips should be specified by the umpire for 
 each round as, — right hand on neighbor's left wrist, left hand grasping right 
 wrist, ordinary hand clasp, " Indian grip " or hooked fingers, etc. The one 
 responsible for a break in circle may be dropped. 
 
 Jolly Fisherman Jumping Circle. 
 
 Players (6 to 25) form a circle about teacher who whirls a weighted rope 
 in circles close to floor. The high jump rope weighted with shot bags or 
 rubber ends is suitable. The " fisherman " attempts to catch the players, who 
 must jump the rope, by varying the speed of the whirling line and passing it 
 readily from hand to hand to obviate turning his body. When a " fish " is 
 caught (generally the rope winds about an ankle) the fisherman should "pay 
 out the line" or let go entirely to prevent pulling on the jumping player. A 
 player caught or allowing the line to touch him must drop out, but he may be 
 allowed to return when the next one fails. The fisherman adds to the interest 
 for children by naming the fish and fisher talk in general. 
 
 Driving the Pig. 
 
 Players 5 to 20, each furnished with a wand form a circle, standing about 
 ten feet apart. At the centre is drawn a circle pen large enough for a 
 basket ball, which is the pig. Small chalk circles are drawn in front of 
 each player (or out-doors a small hole in the ground is made) in which all 
 players must keep the end of wand to hold possession. There must be one 
 fewer holes than players and the game begins by all placing wands beneath 
 basket ball at centre and on signal tossing it upward and then securing a 
 hole by placing end of wand in it. The one left without a place becomes pig 
 driver and attempts to roll ball to centre pen by light taps with wand. The 
 circle players try to prevent this by striking the ball about the circle but out of 
 driver's reach, but at same time they assist him towards securing a hole by 
 " stealing a hole " or taking possession when another removes his wand from a 
 hole. If the ball stops in the pen for a second, the driver calls " change " 
 and all must secure a new hole, which allows him a chance to secure one, 
 thus making a new driver. 
 
 Pin Guard of Club Circle. 
 
 Players form a circle 12' to 20' in diameter standing closely about a 
 leader who attempts to protect a club placed upright in the centre while 
 the circle players try to cause it to fall by throwing or kicking a basket ball. 
 The player who causes it to fall or who has the ball when the centre player 
 knocks it down takes his place as a protector. The one who remains guard 
 longest wins. The ball should be thrown underhanded or should be kicked 
 with the side of the foot. 
 
 Bombardment of Club Game. 
 
 Players (10 to 60) form in two front ranks facing each other at forty 
 feet distance. A centre division line is drawn midway between the parties 
 over which neither may step. Elach player has one club which must be placed 
 
• 62 
 
 upright one foot behind a hne drawn parallel with the rank. On the centre 
 line are placed all the available bean bags, or better, the various^ sized 
 gymnasium balls, and on signal the ranks charge to gain possession of the 
 ammunition, the object being to bowl over the pins of the opponents while 
 guarding one's own. Fouls are — 1 stepping over the centre line, 2 guarding 
 nearer than one foot from pin, 3 throwing over handed. When a foul is 
 committed the umpire stops game and takes out one pin of the offenders. 
 The side wins which has most pins standing at the call of time or which 
 first succeeds in knocking down all the pins of the enemy. 
 
 Duck on the Rock. 
 
 Playing space 20' x 30'. 
 
 Players 6 to 20. Near one end is placed a stone about a cubic foot in 
 size called The Rock; each player has a small stone about the size of a base' 
 ball, these being the Ducks. A goal line is drawn about 25 feet from the 
 Rock or duck perch, and putting lines radiate from the rock to goal. To 
 begin the game, each player tosses his duck toward the rock and the one 
 which lies farthest away becomes duck on rock while others secure stones and 
 stand behind goal. The object of players now is to toss their stones and 
 displace the duck on rock and then return to the goal line with their ducks 
 before the guard can replace the duck on rock and tag them. Anyone missing 
 the duck* must await a favorable opportunity to secure his duck and run 
 " home," as he is liable to be caught by the guard whenever he touches his 
 duck. But the guard must replace his duck on rock before he may tag any- 
 one, and the players keep each other informed by calling " Ducks off " when 
 it is displaced. A player caught outside goal after touching his duck becomes 
 •the new duck-guard. The guard, when catching a player, may be required to 
 say " guard duck " to make his play count, for if the player caught can shout 
 " double duck " first both players must occupy the rock, each guarding his 
 own duck. A player at goal may relieve one in field by making his duck 
 strike the other, — called " kissing." This game may be played in-doors, using a 
 soft medicine ball for the rock and dumbbells or bean bags for ducks. The 
 floor should be covered with mats to prevent noise and rolling of bells. 
 
 Medicine Ball Races. 
 
 Players (10 to any number) form in columns (two or more), individuals 
 standing straddle (feet 18" or more apart) and by bending forward, being 
 just able to touch the player in front. The player at front of each line has a 
 medicine ball and on signal passes it backward between his feet to next 
 player who rolls it onward in like manner until it reaches the last player 
 who runs with it to head of column and touches the wall or designated 
 starting line, the first ball making circuit counting one point for that side. 
 After each player has made one carry the side having the most points wins, 
 or the game may be made continuous by having each player run to head 
 of his hne and start ball again by passing between his feet. No player 
 may be skipped. 
 
 Variation: Overhead Passing: Object Passing. 
 
 The ball is passed backward over head, each player holding the ball until 
 the one behind takes it out of his hands — throwing not allowed. The last 
 player may run with ball to head of line or each player after being relieved 
 of ball may about face and watch its progress to end of line when it is 
 returned in same manner, the umpire deciding which line of players finished 
 first. No player may be skipped. 
 
 Side Passing, Medicine ball is passed from hand to hand along line of 
 players standing abreast from end to end and back. Several balls may be 
 used in each line, also clubs, bells, bags and any objects of light weight. 
 Players may be required to receive with one hand and pass with other or make 
 complete circle before passing each object, or pass under raised knee, or per- 
 form any motion such as bowing, hopping, etc. 
 
63 
 
 Japanese Tag. 
 
 Rules of tag, but " It " must tag with his left hand while the right hand 
 is held constantly against the spot on his body where he was previously 
 tagged. By tagging a player in an awkward place for him to hold his right 
 hand, as the left knee, he becomes crippled, when every one should play 
 close up to tease him. 
 
 Three Deep. 
 
 The players form a double circle, one within the other. A runner and a 
 catcher are chosen, the former runs around the outside of the circle and 
 steps in front pf some couple ; there will then be three standing in front of 
 each other. The last one then becomes the runner. Tlie catcher must try 
 to touch the runner, or the rear one of the three, whereupon he becomes 
 runner and the other catcher. 
 
 The success of this game depends upon the frequent changes of places. 
 No runner should pass more than half around the circle before stepping in 
 front of some one. 
 
 Running through the circle is not allowed. 
 
 Circle Ball. 
 
 Players stand in a circle, some distance apart. One player in the 
 center. . A large ball is thrown by the players from one to the other. The 
 center tries to get the ball; if successful he changes places with the player who 
 last touched it. 
 
 OTHER GOOD GAMES ARE; 
 
 Black Man 
 
 Beetle Goes Around. 
 
 Pulling, using the Wand. 
 
 Pushing, using the Wand. 
 
 Relay Races. 
 
 Tug of War. 
 
 Last Couple Out. 
 
 Horse and Rider, etc., etc. 
 
 GYMNASTIC ACTION STORY. 
 
 A Gilliwee Picnic. 
 
 One afternoon a Gilliwee Band 
 
 Was walking through a foreign land. 
 (Insist on good positions of head and shoulders while walking. If the 
 head is up and back and the chest high the shoulders will generally assume a 
 good position.) 
 
 For Gilliwees seldom idle stand 
 
 When there's a chance for fun at hand. 
 
 So bending freely to and fro 
 
 With hippity hop the Gilliwees go. 
 (Bend the body freely from side to side while skipping.) 
 
 When to an orchard came the elves 
 
 They then began to help themselves, 
 
 The rosy apples, large and round, 
 
 Were put in baskets on the ground. 
 (Rise on toes, raise the arms forward upward and balance as if picking 
 apples ; lower the heels ; bend forward downward, put apples in basket. Posi- 
 tion. Take one step and repeat.) 
 
64 
 
 But finding water near at hand 
 Away the happy Gilliwees ran. 
 This brings a smile to every face, 
 For Gilliwees love to run and race. 
 (Have the children keep their heads up and back, and lift their heels high.) 
 
 And in the boat, with mirth and fun. 
 
 The oars all move as if 'twere one. 
 (Arms in thrust position, lunge obliquely forward left, trunk downward 
 bend, arms dow.nward straighten, touching the floor ; weight on left leg. Trunk 
 upward raise, arms in thrust position, straighten left leg and bend the right leg, 
 changing the weight to the right leg. Repeat two or three time, then take the 
 same exercise, beginning right.) 
 
 The Gilliwees are not haird to please 
 
 And soon are resting at their ease. 
 
 With breaths of air so fresh and sweet 
 
 Their little row is quite complete. 
 (Raise the arms sideward upward, taking a deep breath. Lower arms side- 
 ward downward, breathing out, emptying the lungs thoroughly. Repeat several 
 times, taking a step after each breath.) 
 
 As through the forest then they go 
 Their knees and toes are raised just so. 
 For as they walk along intent 
 Their minds on other things are bent. 
 (Alternate raising of the knees to right angles with the body, the toes 
 extended downward.) 
 
 When running softly on their toes 
 They hear the water as it flows. 
 Or listen to the rustling trees 
 Or watch the lazy bumble bees. 
 (Run lightly on the toes, lifting the heels high.) 
 
 Now twilight bids them cease to roam 
 And calls them to their happy home. 
 With all the speed that they can find 
 Away to favorite haunts they wind. 
 
 (Wind in and out in a serpentine movement, or inward in a circle, making 
 it smaller and smaller, then unwinding.) 
 
65 
 
 GRADE I. 
 
 Before beginning the regular lesson give some of the preliminary exercises 
 and commands which accustom the pupils to obey with precision and promptness 
 the same commands when given at any time, and enable the teacher to get 
 results without waste of time. 
 
 See Rising Exercises and Routine for Beginning and Closing the Lesson, 
 page 49. 
 
 See Fundamental Standing Position, Fig. 1, page. 7. 
 
 The exercises are to be given by command. 
 
 Show each exercise, but do not neglect to give each its right name. Dem- 
 onstrate before the class for from four to six lessons, then move about the room 
 and let class exercise by command only. 
 
 Give the "Posture Drill" {page 8) at the beginning of each lesson and 
 at various times during the lesson. 
 
 If possible take all exercises out of doors or in the corridors. Use the 
 class room as a last resort. 
 
 The rooms are to be aired while the class exercises. 
 
 Practice each lesson for three weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! In place — rest ! Attention ! 
 
 2 Feet — close ! Open ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Position ! Hips — firm ! Feet — close ! Open ! Position ! 
 
 In place — rest ! 
 
 4 Attention ! Head — backward — bend ! Head — raise ! 
 
 (Note. — Always inhale during backward bend and exhale when raising the 
 head.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Play horse around the room. Gallop like a horse. 
 
 2 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 3. 
 
 3 Breathe by smelling a flower. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Feet— close ! Open ! In place— rest ! 
 
 2 Attention! Arms-sideward — raise! Arms — sink! 
 
 3 Arms-forward— raise ! Arms— sink ! Hips— firm ! Position I 
 
 4 Hips— firm! Head-backward— bend ! Raise! Position! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Play " Ducks Fly." 
 
 2 Breathe looking at the stars. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Hips— firm ! Feet— close ! Feet— open ! 
 
 2 Attention! Arms-upward— bend ! Downward— stretch ! Upward- 
 
 bend ! Downward — stretch ! 
 
 3 Head-backward— bend ! Raise ! 
 
 4 Play horse. 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 50, No. L 
 
 2 Snowing. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 1. 
 
 3 Arms-sideward— raise ! (Inhale.) Arms-sink! (Exhale.) 
 
65 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Feet-sideward— place ! Feet-together — place! (Children 
 
 count, 1-2.) 
 
 2 In place — rest! 
 
 3 Attention! Arms-sideward — raise! Arms — sink! Forward-^dress ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 3. 
 
 2 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 50, No. 2. 
 
 3 Arms-sideward— raise ! Sink! (Inhale and exhale.) 
 
 Lesson V. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Hips — firm! Feet— close ! Feet — open! Position! Arms- 
 
 sideward — raise! Sink! 
 
 2 Arms-upward — bend ! Downward — stretch ! Arms-forward — raise ! 
 
 Arms — sink ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Feet sideward — place ! Feet-together — place ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Warm the Hands and Feet; Warm the body: See Imaginary Plays, 
 page 51, Nos. 4 and 5. 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Hips — firm! Feet-sideward — place! Together — place! 
 
 Position. 
 
 2 Arms-forward — bend ! Position ! Arms-forward — raise ! Arms — sink ! 
 Note. — Be sure and get the children to see this difference. 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Heels — raise ! Heels — sink ! Position ! 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise ! Inhale ! Arms — sink ! Exhale ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 50, Nos. 2 and 3. 
 
 2 Arms — raise! Sink! (Inhale and exhale.) 
 
 Lesson VII. 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Feet-sideward— place ! Together — ^place ! Feet — close ! 
 
 Open ! 
 
 2 Arms-upward — ^bend ! Downward — stretch ! Arms-forward — bend ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward and upward — raise ! Forward and downward — sink ! 
 
 4 Inhale and exhale looking at the stars. * 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Skip and hop around the room. 
 
 2 Pick Apples. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 6. 
 
 3 Tossing Bean Bags : See School Room Games, page 51, No. 4. 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend! Raise! 
 
67 • 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 First Period^ 
 
 1 Attention ! Arms-upward — bend ! Sideward — stretch ! Arms — bend ! 
 
 Stretch ! Position ! 
 
 2 Hips — firm! Feet-sideward — place! Together — place! (Children count, 
 
 1-2.) Position! 
 
 3 Hips — firm! Position! Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! Bend! 
 
 Fling ! Position ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! Forward — move ! Inhale and 
 
 exhale. 
 Note. — 'To the regular position of the shoulders on " Forward — move ! " 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Ordinary march around the room. 
 
 2 Snowing. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 1. 
 
 3 Heels — raise! Heels — sink! (Inhale and exhale.) 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Feet-sideward — place ! Together — place ! Left foot-forward 
 
 — place ! Replace ! Place ! Replace ! Right foot-forward — place ! Re- 
 place ! etc. 
 
 2 Hips — firm ! Knees — bend ! Knees— stretch ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-upward — bend ! Sideward and downward — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 4 Arms-forward and upward — raise! (Inhale.) Forward and downward 
 
 — sink! (Exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Play horse and " ducks fly." 
 
 2 Bean Bag Races. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 6. 
 
 (Insist on the feet of every child being under the desk and not out in the 
 aisle.) 
 
 3 Take a breathing exercise you have had. 
 
 Lesson X. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Hips — firm ! Knees — bend ! Knees — stretch ! Position ! 
 
 2 Bean Bag Races. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 6. 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Trunk — raise ! Bend ! Raise ! 
 
 (Keep head up.) 
 
 4 Head — backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 School room games. Take some active game you know. 
 
 2 Each row of pupils assumes the name of a bird. When the teacher calls 
 
 for one — say a robin — the robins fly around the room. This continues 
 until all have been out. 
 
 Lesson XL * 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! In place — rest ! Attention ! Feet — close ! Feet — open ! In 
 
 place — rest ! 
 
 2 Attention ! Forward — dress ! Position ! 
 
 3 Left foot-forward — place ! Replace ! Right foot-forward — place ! Re- 
 
 place. 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise! (Inhale.) Arms — sink! (Exhale.) 
 
68 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 1. 
 
 2 Attention ! Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Lesson XIL 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Feet-sideward — place! Together — place! (Children count 
 
 2 Hips — firm ! Heels — raise ! Heels — sink ! Position ! 
 
 3 Trunk-forward — bend! Raise! Bend! Raise! 
 
 4 Arms-forward — ^bend ! Fling! (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, pa^e 50, Nos. 1, 2 and 3. 
 
 2 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 51, Lesson 3. 
 
 3 Hips — firm! Shoulders-backward — move! (Inhale.) Forward — move! 
 
 (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson XIII. 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Arms-forward and upward — raise! Forward and down- 
 
 ward — sink ! 
 
 2 Arms-upward — bend ! Arms-sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 Downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Position ! Climb rope. See Imaginary Plays, page , 
 
 No. 7. 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise! (Inhale.) Sink! (Exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 5. 
 
 2 Climb Rope. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 7. 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Feet-sideward — place! Together — place! Feet — close! Open! 
 
 2 Arms-forward — bend! Arms-sideward — fling! Bend! FHng! Arms — 
 
 sink ! In place — rest ! 
 
 3 Feet — close ! Feet — open ! Knees — bend ! Knees — stretch ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend! Head — raise! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 50, No. 1. 
 
 2 Marching lesson. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 4. 
 
 3 Arms-sideward — raise! (Inhale.) Sink! (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Forward — dress ! Position ! . Arms-sideward and upward — 
 
 raise ! Sideward and downward — sink ! 
 
 2 Left foot-forward — place! Feet — change! (Children count 1-2.) Re- 
 
 place ! » 
 
 3 Arms-upward^bend ! Downward^-stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Head- 
 
 backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 4 Heels — raise ! Heels — sink ! Position ! (Inhale and exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching lesson. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 7. 
 
 2 Pick apples. 
 
 Lesson XVI. A General Review. 
 
69 
 
 GRADE II. 
 
 Before beginning the regular lesson give some of the preliminary exercises 
 and commands which -accustom the pupils to obey with precision and prompt- 
 ness the same commands when given at any time, and enables the teacher to 
 get results without waste of time. 
 
 See Rising Exercises and Routine for Beginning and Closing the Lesson, 
 page 7. 
 
 See Fundamental Standing Position, Fig. 1, page 7. 
 
 The exercises are to be given by command. 
 
 Show each exercise, but do not neglect to give each its right name. 
 Demonstrate before the class for from four to six lessons, then move about the 
 room and let class exercise by command only. 
 
 Give the ''Posture Drill" (page 8) at the beginning of each lesson and at 
 various times during the lesson. 
 
 If possible take all exercises out of doors or in the corridors. Use the 
 class room as a last resort. 
 
 The rooms are to be aired while the class exercises. 
 
 Practice each lesson for three weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! In place — rest ! Attention ! 
 
 2 Feet — close ! Feet — open ! In-place — rest ! 
 
 3 Attention ! Forward — dress ! Position ! Left foot-forward — place ! 
 Replace ! Right foot-forward — place ! Replace ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend! (Always inhale.) Head — raise! (Always 
 exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Play horse and " ducks fly." 
 
 2 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 6 (a). 
 
 Lesson II. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Hips — firm ! Knees — bend ! Knees — stretch ! Position ! 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Arms — bend ! Stretch ! Position ! 
 
 3 Hips — ^firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Trunk — raise ! Bend ! Raise ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 1 School Room Game. See page 50. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! In place — rest ! Attention ! Feet — close ! Feet — open ! In 
 
 place — rest ! 
 
 2 Attention ! Forward — dress ! Position ! 
 
 3 Left foot-forward — place ! Replace ! Right foot-forward — place ! 
 
 Replace ! 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise! (Inhale.) Arms — sink! (Exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 1. 
 
 2 Attention ! Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
70 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Feet-sideward — place! Together— place !• (Children count 
 
 1-2.) 
 
 2 Hips— firm! Heels — raise! Heels — sink! Position! 
 
 3 Trunk-forward — bend! Raise! Bend! Raise! 
 
 4 Arms-forward— bend ! Fling! (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 50, No. 2. 
 
 2 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 3. 
 
 3 Hips— firm ! Shoulders-backward— move ! (Inhale.) Forward— move ! 
 
 (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Arms-forward and upward — raise ! Forward and downward 
 
 — sink ! 
 
 2 Arms-upward — bend ! Arms-sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 Downward — stretch ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Position ! Climb Rope ! See Imaginary Plays, page 51, 
 
 No. 7. 
 
 4 Arms-sideward— rraise ! (Inhale.) Sink! (Exhale.) 
 
 Note. — The last exercise should always be a breathing exercise. 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 5. 
 
 2 Climb Rope Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 7. 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Feet-sideward — place ! Together — place ! Feet — close ! 
 
 Open ! 
 
 2 Arms-forward — bend! Arms-sideward — fling!' Bend! Fling! Arms — 
 
 sink ! In place — rest ! 
 
 3 Feet — close ! Feet — open ! Knees — bend ! Knees — stretch ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Head — raise ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 50, No. 1. 
 
 2 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lessons 2 and 5. 
 
 3 Arms-sideward — raise ! Sink. 
 
 Lesson VIL 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Forward — dress ! Position ! Arms — sideward and upward — 
 
 raise! Sideward and downward — sink! 
 
 2 Arms-upward — ^bend ! Downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Head- 
 
 backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 3 Left foot-forward — place ! Feet — change ! 1-2. Change ! Replace ! 
 
 4 Heels — raise! Heels — sink! Position! (Inhale and exhale.) 
 Note. — The last exercise should always be a breathing exercise. 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. Place the left foot forward, raising the right heel. Place the 
 
 right foot in front of the left, raising the left heel, and carry the body 
 well forward with the chest out. Continue around the room in two 
 counts. 
 
 2 Pick apples. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 6. 
 
71 
 
 Lesson Vm. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Arms-forward and upward — raise ! Forward and downward 
 
 — sink ! Arms-upward — bend! Sideward — stretch! Bend! Stretch! 
 Bend ! Downward — stretch ! 
 
 2 Left-foot — forward — place ! Feet — change ! Replace ! Feet-sideward — 
 
 place! Together — place! 
 
 3 Hips — firm! Heels — raise! Heels — sink! Trunk-forward — bend! 
 
 Trunk — raise ! Position ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Head — raise ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 2. 
 
 2 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 4. 
 
 3 Pick Apples. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 6. 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise ! Arms — sink ! 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Alternate-toes^ — raise! (Children count one! two! three! 
 
 four!) Halt! Feet-sideward — place! Together — place! 
 
 2 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! Bend! Fling! Position! 
 
 Arms-upward — bend ! Arms-forward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 Position ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Knees — bend ! Knees — stretch ! Trunk-forward — bend ! 
 
 Raise ! 
 
 4 Shoulders-backward — move! Forward — move! Position! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lessons 2 and 4. 
 
 2 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lesson 6. 
 
 3 Arms-forward and upward — raise! Forward and downward and sink! 
 
 Lesson X. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-forward — place ! Feet — change ! Position ! Alter- 
 
 nate-toes — raise ! Halt ! 
 
 2 Arms-upward— bend ! Arms-upward — stretch ! Arms — bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 Bend! Position! Arms-sideward — raise! Fingers — bend and stretch ! 
 (Double the fists,^ then stretch all the fingers forcibly, repeat 8 to 16 
 limes.) Arms — sink! 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Knees — bend ! Knees — stretch ! Trunk-forward — bend ! 
 
 Raise ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend! Raise! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bow and Arrow Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 8. 
 
 2 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 10. 
 
 3 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! Bend! Position! 
 
 Lesson XI. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-backward — place ! Replace ! Right foot-back- 
 
 ward — place ! Replace ! Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm ! (The 
 hands are placed on the hips on count two.) Arms-down, and feet 
 together — place ! 
 
 2 Feet — close ! Open ! Heels — raise ! Heels — sink ! 
 
72 
 
 3 Arms-upward — bend ! Arms-sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Forward — stretch ! Arms — sink ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm! Shoulders-backward — move! Forward — move! Head- 
 
 backward — bend! Raise! Position! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 4. 
 
 2 Wood Plays. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, Nos. 11 and 12. 
 
 3 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 7 and 10. 
 
 4 Arms-sideward and upward — raise! Sideward and downward — sink! 
 
 Lesson XH. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-backward — place ! Feet — change ! Alternate- 
 
 toes — raise ! Halt ! 
 
 2 Arms-forward — raise ! Sink ! Arms-sideward — raise ! Sink ! Arms 
 
 -upward — bend ! Sideward — stretch ! Fingers — bend and stretch ! 
 Halt ! Arms — sink ! 
 
 3 Hips — 'firm! Head-to left — twist! Forward — twist! To right — twist! 
 
 Forward — twist ! Position ! 
 
 4 Arms-forward and upward — raise ! Sideward and downward — sink ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 8. 
 
 2 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 5. 
 
 3 Attention ! Arms-sideward — stretch ! Arms-downward — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Stretch! Bend! Stretch, etc. 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Lesson XHL 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-forward — place, and hips — firm ! Position ! Right 
 
 foot-forward — place, and hips — firm ! Position ! Feet — close ! Open ! 
 
 2 Arms-forward — bend ! Sideward — fling ! Bend ! Fling ! Position ! 
 
 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Downward — stretch ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Heels^raise ! Knees — bend ! Knees — stretch ! Heels — 
 
 sink ! Position ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 6 (a). 
 
 2 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page — , Lessons 9 and 10. 
 
 3 Wood Play : Saw Wood ; Splitting Wood. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, 
 
 Nos. 11 and 12. 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! Forward — move ! Position ! 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 Review Lesson XII. 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 Review Lesson XIII. > ! ; ' 
 
76 
 
 GRADE III. 
 
 Before beginning the regular lesson give some of the preliminary exercises 
 and commands which accustom the pupils to obey with precision and prompt- 
 ness the same commands when given at any time, and enables the teacher to 
 get results without waste of time. 
 
 See Rising Exercises and Routine for Beginning and Closing the Lesson, 
 page 49. 
 
 See Fundamental Standing Position, Fig. 1, page 7. 
 
 The exercises are to be given by command. 
 
 Show each exercise, but do not neglect to give each its right name. 
 Demonstrate before the class for from four to six lessons, then move about the 
 room and let the class exercise by command only. 
 
 Give ''Posture Drill" (page 8) at the beginning and at various times 
 during the lesson. 
 
 If possible take all exerci&es out of doors or in the corridors. Use the 
 class room as a last resort. 
 
 The rooms are to be aired while the class exercises. 
 
 Practise each lesson for three weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! In place — rest ! Attention ! Feet — close ! Feet — open. 
 
 2 Head-backward — ^bend ! Head — raise! Bend! Raise! (Always inhale' 
 
 during the backward bending of the head, and exhale when raise.) 
 
 3 Arms-upward — bend! Downward — stretch! Arms-forward — bend I 
 
 Sideward — fling! Bend! Fling! Arms — sink! Arms-forward and 
 upward — raise! (Inhale.) Arms-sideward and downward — sink! 
 (Exhale.) 
 Note. — The last exercise should always be a breathing exercise. 
 
 Second Period. 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lessons 1, 2 and 3. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Feet-sideward — place! Feet-together— place ! (Children 
 
 count one! two !) 
 
 2 Hips — firm! Trunk-forward— bend ! Trunk — raise! Position! (Slow 
 
 time.) 
 
 3 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Bend ! Downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm! Shoulders-backward — move! (Always inhale.) Forward 
 
 — move! (Always exhale.) Position! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lessons 3^and 5. 
 3 Climb Rope Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 7. 
 
 • Lesson III. 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Left foot-forward— place ! Feet— change ! Position! Left 
 foot — backward — place! Feet — change! Position! (Children count 
 one ! two !) 
 Note. — Be sure to distinguish the difference between the forward and 
 backward placing. The weight should be evenly distributed over both 
 feet. 
 
74 
 
 2 Head-to left— twist ! Forward— twist ! To right— twist! Forward- 
 
 twist! Arms-forward— stretch ! Bend! Stretch! Bend! Stretch! 
 Downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm! Trunk-forward^bend ! Raise! Position! Feet-sideward 
 
 — place, and hips— firm ! Heels — ^raise ! Sink ! Feet-together — place. 
 
 4 Arms-forward, upward — raise ! Sideward and downward— sink ! 
 
 Second Period^. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 7 and 10. 
 
 2 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 50, Nos. 1, 2 and 3. 
 
 3 Arms-forward— bend ! Sideward— fling ! (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) 
 
 Position ! 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Left — face! one! two! Right — face! one! two! 
 
 2 Hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Trunk — raise ! Head-to left — 
 
 twist! Forward — twist! To right — twist! Forward — twist! Position! 
 
 3 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Downward — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Stretch! Arms-sideward and downward — stretch! Bend! Stretch 
 Bend ! Stretch ! Position ! 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend! Head — raise! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21, Lessons 4 and 6. 
 
 2 Bow and Arrow Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 8. 
 
 Lesson V. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Left— face ! Left— face! Right— face ! Left— face ! Right 
 
 — face! Right — face! (Children count one! two!) Alternate toes — 
 raise ! 1, 2, 3, 4. Halt ! Feet — close ! Feet — open ! 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Downward — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Stretch ! Arms-forward and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 Bend! Stretch! Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! Position! 
 
 4 Hips — firm, and Feet — close ! Heels— raise ! Heels — sink ! Position ! 
 
 (Feet-open and hands — down!) 
 
 5 Shoulder-circling — one! two! three! (Breathing exercise.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21. Combine Lessons 6 and 7, 
 
 alternating eight counts each. 
 
 2 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 4. 
 
 3 See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 3. 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Lesson VI, 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Left-about— face ! one ! two ! Right-about— face ! one! two! 
 
 2 Hips — firm! Trunk-forward— bend ! Trunk^raise! Head-backward — 
 
 bend! Head — raise! Position! 
 
 3 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm! Trunk-backward— bend ! Trunk 
 
 — raise ! Position ! 
 
75 
 
 4 Arms-upward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Downward — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Stretch ! Arms-upward and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 Bend ! Stretch ! Arms-forward and sideward — stretch ! Bend I 
 Stretch ! Bend ! ^t^^etch ! Arms — sink ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward, and heels — raise! (Inhale.) Arms and heels — sink! 
 
 (Exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 8 and 9. 
 
 2 Snow Plays. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, Nos. 3 and 4. 
 
 3 Hips — firm! Trunk-backward — bend ! (Inhale.) Trunk — raise! (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson VII. 
 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Left — face! Left-about — face! Right — face! Right-about 
 
 — face! (Children count.) Left foot-forward, and replace, and-back- 
 ward, and replace — place! (Children count one! two! three! four!) 
 Right foot the same. 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise ! Fingers — bend, and — stretch ! Position ! Hips 
 
 — firm! Trunk-to left — bend! Raise! To right — bend! Raise! 
 
 3 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm! Trunk-forward — bend! Trunk — 
 
 raise ! Position ! Arms-sideward and upward — stretch ! Bend 1 
 Stretch! Bend! Stretch! 
 
 4 Arms-forward and upward — raise! (Inhale.) Sideward and downward 
 
 — sink! (Exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Class Room Tactics, page 18, Lessons 1 and 2. 
 
 2 Throw Lasso. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 9. 
 
 3 Shoulder circling one ! two ! three ! 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 First Period. 
 1 Attention! Left— face ! Half-left— face ! Half-left— face ! Left-about- 
 face ! Right — face ! Half-right — face ! Right-about — ^face ! Half- 
 right — face ! 
 ■2 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm! Trunk-forward — bend! Trunk- 
 raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-sideward — raise! Arm rotation — one! two! Arms — sink! Arms- 
 
 half forward — bend ! Position ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! and feet — close ! Heels — raise ! Heels — sink ! Position I 
 
 Hips — firm! Trunk-to left — bend! Raise! To right — bend! Raise! 
 Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward and heels — raise ! Sink ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bean Bags. See School Roorn Games, page 51, I^o. 6 (a). 
 
 2 Repeat the marching lessons in Lessons IV and VII. 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! One step forward — march! (left! right!) Left — face! One 
 
 step to left — march ! Right — face ! Feet-sideward — place, and hips — 
 firm ! Feet-together — place ! Position ! 
 
 2 Hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Forward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Position ! 
 "3 Arms-forward and upward — fling! Forward and downward — sink! 
 Arms-sideward, upward and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc, 
 
 4 Hips — firm, and feet close ! Heels — raise ! Sink ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward — raise ! Arms-circling — one ! two ! three ! Arms — sink I 
 
76 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 21. Combine Lessons 6 and 7. 
 
 alternating eight counts each. 
 
 2 Saw Wood Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 11. 
 
 3 Head-backward — bend ! Head — raise ! 
 
 Lesson X. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Three steps-forward — march ! Right — face ! Three steps to 
 
 the right — march ! Left — face ! Left foot-forward, and replace, side- 
 ward and replace — place! (Children count!) Right foot the same. 
 
 2 Arms-forward — raise! Sideward — stretch! Upward — raise! Hips — 
 
 Firm ! Position ! Arms-forward, upward and downward — stretch ! 
 Bend! Stretch! Bend! Stretch! etc. 
 
 3 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — ^bend ! ■ Raise ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4 Arms-sideward and heels — raise ! Sink ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 8 and 9. 
 
 2 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 7. 
 
 3 Attention ! Hips — firm ! Heels — raise ! Feet-sideward, and together — 
 
 place, with a jump — one! two! one! two. (Stride — jump!) 
 
 4 Head-backward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 Lesson XL 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Two steps-forward and two steps backward — march ! Left — 
 
 face ! Right — face ! 
 
 2 Arms-forward and upward — fling! Forward and downward — sink! 
 
 Arms-sideward — ^stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Upward — raise ! For- 
 ward — sink ! Downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! Feet-sideward — 
 
 place, and hips — firm ! Trunk forward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Arm-rotation ! one ! two ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward — raise, and feet — close ! Heels — raise ! Heels — sink I 
 
 Position! (Inhale and exhale.) 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Marching. General marching review. Master all marching lessons taken 
 
 thus far. 
 
 2 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, No. 5. 
 
 3 Swimming. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 14. 
 
 4 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) 
 
 Position. 
 
 Lesson XII. 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention! Dress — right! Front! (See page 20.) Forward — dress! 
 Position! Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm! Arms-down, and 
 feet-together — place ! 
 2 Head-backward — bend! Head — raise! Head-to left — twist! Forward 
 — twist ! To right — twist ! Forward — twist ! 
 
 3 Hips — firm! Heels — raise! Knees — bend! Knees — stretch! Heels — 
 
 sink ! 
 
 4 Left leg-sideward — raise! Sink! Right leg-sideward — raise! Sink! 
 
 Position- 1 
 
 5 Hips — firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! Forward — move ! Position ! 
 
TJ 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Rowing. Sit on the desk with feet in the chair and the upper arms and 
 
 elbows close to the body, hands by the chest ; bend the trunk forward 
 with the chest well forward and the head well back, and stretch the 
 arms forward ; raise the trunk and bend the arms to the chest. 
 
 2 Mark — time — mark ! Class — halt ! one ! two ! Practice ordinary march- 
 
 ing from Mark — time — mark ! and get each individual to halt on the 
 command, Class — halt! See Class Room Tactics, page 18, Lesson 1. 
 
 Lesson XIIL 
 First Period. 
 
 1 Attention ! Feet — close ! Feet — open ! Feet — sideward — place ! Together 
 
 — place ! 
 
 2 Hips — firm ! Trunk- forward — bend ! Raise ! Head-backward — bend ! 
 
 Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-upward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Downward' — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Stretch ! Left arm-forward and upward — fling ! Arms — change ! 
 Position ! 
 
 4 Feet — close ! Trunk-to left — bend ! Raise ! To right — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward and heels — raise ! Sink ! 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 1 Bow and Arrow Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 8. 
 
 2 Throw the Lasso Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 9. 
 
 3 Prepare to jump — one! two! three — four! five! six! (Heels raise on 
 
 one, knees bend on two, jump up in the air and land with bent knees 
 on three and four, knees stretch on five, and heels sink on six.) 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 1 Review Lessons XII and XIII. 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 1 General review. 
 
7^ 
 
 GRADE IV. 
 
 Before beginning the regular lesson it will be found necessary to spend some 
 time in the review of the preliminary exercises and commands used most fre- 
 quently in every-day work. See Rising Exercises and Routine for Beginning 
 and Closing the Lesson, on pages 49 and 50. 
 
 See Fundamental Standing Position, Fig. 1, page 7. 
 
 The exercises are to be given by command. 
 
 Arrange pupils according to sex and size. 
 
 Frequently call attention to correct sitting, standing and walking. 
 
 Show each exercise but do not neglect to give each its right name. Demon- 
 strate before the class for from four to six lessons, then move about the room 
 and let the class exercise by command only. 
 
 Give the "Posture Drill" (page 8) at the beginning of the lesson and at 
 •Various times during the lesson. 
 
 If possible take all exercises out of doors or in the corridors. Use the class 
 room as a last resort. Jumping and marching exercises should be taken outside 
 the class room. 
 
 The rooms are to be aired while the class exercises. 
 
 Practice each exercise six, eight or ten times. 
 
 Practice each lesson for three weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 1 Attention ! Right — face ! Left— face ! Left — face ! Dress — left ! Front ! 
 
 Right — face ! Forward— dress ! 
 
 2 Hips — firm! Trunk-forward — bend! Raise! Position! 
 
 3 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! Bend! Fling! Arms-sink! 
 
 4 Hands on desk — place ! Left knee-upward — bend ! Downward — place ! 
 
 Right knee-upward — bend ! Downward — place ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-upward — ^bend! Left arm-upward — stretch! Left arm — ^bend, and 
 
 right arm-upward — stretch! Arms — change! (In one count. Arms 
 come to bend position each time.) 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk to left — twist ! Forward — 
 
 twist ! To right — twist ! Forward—twist ! Position ! 
 
 7 Heels — raise ! Quick time in place — march ! Class — halt ! one ! two ! 
 
 three ! four ! Heels — sink ! 
 
 8 Thow the Lasso Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 9. 
 
 9 Arms-sideward, and heels — raise! (Inhale.) Sink. (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-forward — place ! Feet — change — one ! two ! Foot 
 — replace ! 
 •2 Head-to left— bend ! Head— raise ! To right— bend ! Raise! Head- 
 backward — 'bend ! Raise ! 
 
 3 Arms-sideward, and downward— stretch ! Bend! Stretch! Bend! 
 
 Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Feet-sideward— place, and hips— firm ! Heels— raise ! Sink! Feet- 
 
 together — place ! 
 
 5 Neck— firm ! Left hip, and right neck— firm ! Change ! Position ! 
 
 6 Arm-sideward— raise ! Trunk-forward— bend ! Raise! Arms— sink! 
 
 7 Hips — firm! Heels — raise! Stride-jump— one ! two I one! two! (The 
 
 same as "Feet-sideward, and together — place with a jump.") Class — 
 halt ! one ! two ! three ! four ! Position ! 
 
 8 Marching: March forward and halt. See Class Room Tactics, page 19, 
 
 Lesson 2. 
 
 9 Arms-forward and upward — raise! Sideward and downward — sink! 
 Note. — The last exercise should always be a breathing exercise. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 1 Attention! Left foot-outward— place ! Replace! Right foot-outward— 
 place ! Replace ! 
 
2 Feet-sideward— place, and hips — firm! Trunk-backward — bend! Raise! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-sideward and upward — stretch! Bend! Stretch! etc. Downward 
 
 —stretch! Bend! Stretch! etc. 
 
 4 Review marching lesson of Lesson II, Grade IV, and see Rhythmical 
 
 Steps, page , Lesson 9. 
 
 5 Left arm-sideward, and right arm-upward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 Arms — change I One 1 two ! Downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 6 Feet-close, and hips — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! Forward — twist ! To 
 
 right — twist ! Forward — twist ! Position ! 
 
 7 Heels — raise! Stride — jump! one! two! Class — halt! one! two! three! 
 
 four ! Heels — sink ! 
 
 8 Hips — firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! Forward — move ! Position ! 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left about — face ! Right about — face ! 
 
 2 Hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Trunk-^backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Arms-downward — stretch ! 
 
 Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Left knee-upward — bend ! Downward — place ! Right knee- 
 
 upward — bend ! Downward — place ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Hands — turn ! Left arm- 
 
 upward — bend! Arms — change! (The same as "Alternate arms 
 stretching sideward," with the palms up.) 
 
 6 Left hip, and right neck — firm! Trunk-to left — ^bend ! Raise! To 
 
 right — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 7 Marching. March forward and backward : See Class Room Tactics, 
 
 page 19, Lesson 3. 
 Splitting Wood. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 12. 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 1 Attention! Half left— face ! Half right- face ! 
 
 2 Head-to left — twist! Head-backward — ^bend ! (Toward right shoulder.) 
 
 Head — raise ! Head-forward, and to right — twist ! Backward — bend ! 
 Raise ! Forward — twist ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward and sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc. Down- 
 
 ward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 4 Hands on desks — place ! Left leg-forward — raise ! Sink ! Right leg- 
 
 forward — raise ! Sink ! Position ! 
 
 5 Hips-firm, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Head — 
 
 rotation ! one ! two ! three ! four ! 
 Note. — Same as head to left-forward-right-forward — twist ! 
 
 6 Neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 7 In place — jump! one! two! three — four! five! six! See page 17, No. 11. 
 
 8 Arms-sideward — raise! Hands — turn! Arms-upward — raise! (Inhale.) 
 
 Sideward — sink! (Exhale.) Position! 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 
 1 Attention ! Alternate toes — raise ! one ! two ! three ! four ! Class — halt ! 
 
 one ! two ! 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Raise ! Arms-^sink ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward, sideward, and upward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Neck — firm ! Heels — raise ! Knees— bend ! Knees — stretch ! Heels — 
 
 sink ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-forward — bend ! Sideward — fling ! Position ! 
 
80 
 
 6 Golf Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, Lesson 13. 
 
 7 Marching. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 11 (a), (b), (c). 
 
 8 Heels — raise ! Quick time in place — march ! Class — ^halt ! one ! two ! 
 
 three ! four ! Heels — sink ! Same as running in place. 
 
 9 Shoulder circling! one! two! three! 
 
 Lesson VIL 
 
 1 Attention ! Left— face ! Left about— face ! Half left— face ! Half left- 
 
 face ! (The same to the right!) 
 
 2 Head-to left— bend ! Raise ! To right^bend ! Raise ! To left— twist ! 
 
 Forward, and to right — twist ! Forward — twist ! Backward — bend ! 
 Raise ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward — raise! Arms-sideward — fling! Forward — fling! Side- 
 
 ward — fling ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm! Left knee-upward — bend! Downward — place! Right the 
 
 same. 
 
 5 Arms-backward — stretch ! Bend ! stretch ! 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm! Trunk-to left — bend! Raise! 
 
 To right—bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 7 Left foot-forward — place ! Heels — raise ! In quick time-change — one ! 
 
 two ! one ! two ! Class — halt ! one ! two ! three ! four ! 
 
 8 Water Play : Swimming. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 14. 
 
 9 Marching : Change Step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 12 
 
 (a), (b), Cc), (d). 
 10 Arms-sideward, and upward, and heels — raise! Sideward and down- 
 ward, and heels — sink ! 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left — face ! One step to left — march ! Right — face ! One 
 
 step forward^ — march ! 
 Marching. March forward and backward. (See Lesson IV, No. 7.) 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise! Trunk-forward — bend! Trunk — raise! Arms- 
 
 sink! 
 
 3 Arms-forward — fling ! Sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Neck — 
 
 firm ! Position ! 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise, and feet — close ! Heels — raise ! Heels — sink ! 
 
 Position! Hips — firm! Left leg-forward — raise! Sink! (Right leg 
 the same.) Position! 
 
 5 Left arm-upward, and right arm-sideward — stretch! Bend! Stretch! 
 
 Change ! one ! two ! Position ! 
 
 6 Right arm-upward — stretch, and feet — close ! Bend ! Stretch ! Trunk to 
 
 left — bend ! Raise ! Arms — change ! one ! two ! Trunk to right — 
 bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 7 Sit on desks^ — place! (Feet under seat.) Hips — firm! Trunk-to left — 
 
 twist ! Forward, and to right — ^twist ! Forward — ^twist ! Position ! 
 
 8 BoAv and Arrow Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 8. 
 
 9 Arms-forward— bend ! Sideward — fling ! Bend ! Fling ! Sink ! 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-forward-and replace and backward and replace — 
 
 place! (Four counts.) (Right foot the same.) 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise! Head-rotation — one! two! three! four! Head- 
 
 backward — bend! Head — raise! Arms— ^sink! 
 
 3 Arms-upward — bend ! Left arm-sideward — stretch ! Arms — change ! 1-2. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4 Marching: Change step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 12 
 
 (complete) and 13 (a) and (b). 
 
 5 Neck — firm ! Trunk-forward — ^bend ! Raise ! Backward — bend ! Raises! 
 
 ■ Position ! 
 
81 
 
 6 Arms-sideward — raise ! Trunk-to left — bend ! Truiik — raise ! To 
 
 right — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 7 Heels — raise! Stride-jump — one! two! one! two! Class — halt! 
 
 8 Shoulder-circling- — one! two! three! (Breathing exercise.) 
 
 Lesson X. 
 
 1 Attention ! Number ofif by twos ! No. Ones-one step forward — march ! 
 
 No. Ones-one step backward, and No. Twos-one step forward — march ! 
 No. Twos-one step backward — march! (Alternate- rows are ones and 
 twos.) 
 Marching: March forward and backward: Slow march: Change from 
 Normal to slow march. See Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lessons 
 3 and 4. 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-forward — 
 
 bend ! Trunk — raise ! Arms-downward — stretch, and feet-together — 
 place ! Head-to left — twist ! Backward — bend ! Raise ! Forward and 
 to right — twist! Backward — bend! Raise! Forward — twist ! Position! 
 
 3 Arms-upward, backward, and downward— stretch ! 
 
 4 Left foot-forward — place, and hips-firm ! Heels — raise ! Sink ! Feet — 
 • change, etc. Hands on desk — place ! Left knee-upward — bend ! 
 
 Knee-forward — stretch ! Bend ! Knees — changed ! one ! two ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-half forward — bend ! Arm rotation — one ! two ! Position ! Arms- 
 
 forward^ — bend ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Arms-sideward — fling ! Bend ! 
 Fling! Trunk — raise! Position! 
 
 6 Water Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 14. 
 
 7 Left foot-forward — place ! Heels — raise ! In quick time-feet — change ! 
 
 one! two! one! two! etc. In place — jump! See page 17, No. 11. 
 
 8 Arms-upward — bend! With palms up-arms-slowly sideward — stretch! 
 
 (Inhale.) Arms — bend! (Exhale.) Position! 
 
 Lesson XI, 
 
 1 Attention ! Two steps-forward, and two steps-^backward — march ! Half- 
 
 right — face ! Half-left — face ! 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Forward-bend! Raise! Position! 
 
 3 Arms-upward — bend ! Left arm-forward — stretch ! Arms — change ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4 Marching : Double Change Step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, 
 
 Lesson 13 (c). 
 Arms-sideward, and heels — raise ! Knees — bend ! Stretch ! Arms and 
 heels — ^sink ! . 
 
 5 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm ! Trunk — forward — bend ! Head- 
 
 rotation ! etc. • 
 
 6 Arms-forward — bend ! Trunk-backward — bend'! Arms-sideward — fling I 
 
 Bend! Fling! Trunk — raise! Position! 
 Bow and Arrow Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 8. 
 Throw the Lasso Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 9. 
 
 7 In place — jump! etc. Heels-raise! Stride — jump! etc. iv' ' 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend! Heels — raise, and arms-sideward — fling! Ar,^iiiftr* 
 
 bend and heels — sink! Position! 
 
 Lesson XII. 
 
 1 Attention ! Three steps-forward and three steps-backward — march I 
 
 Left — face! Left-about — face! Right — face! Right-about — face! 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! For- 
 
 ward — bend! Raise! Position! 
 
 3 Arms-upward — bend ! Left arm-upward — stretch ! Arms — change I 
 
 Both arms-backward — stretch ! Position ! 
 
82 
 
 4 Hands-on desks — place! Left knee-upward — bend! Forward — stretch! 
 
 Bend ! Change ! one ! two ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-half forward — bend ! Arm rotation — one ! two ! Position ! 
 
 6 Sit on desks — place! Trunk-to left — twist! Forward and to right — 
 
 twist, etc. 
 
 7 General review of all marching exercises. Be sure they are well 
 
 mastered. 
 
 8 Arms-forward — raise! Sideward — fling! (Inhale.) Forward — fling! 
 
 (Exhale.) Position! 
 
 Lesson XIIL 
 
 1 Attention ! Number off by twos ! No. Ones-one step-forward — march ! 
 
 No. Ones and Twos- change — march ! No, Twos^one step-backward — 
 march ! 
 
 2 Left foot-forward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! 
 
 Raise ! Feet — change ! etc. 
 
 3 Arms-sideward — fling ! Forward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Upward — 
 
 fling! Sideward and downward — sink! 
 
 4 Feet-sideward — place, and arms-sideward — stretch ! Heels — raise ! 
 
 Knees — ^bend ! Knees — stretch ! Heels — sink ! Position ! (In one 
 count with jump.) 
 
 5 Neck — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 6 Right arm-upwafd — stretch ! Trunk-to left — bend ! Raise ! Arms — 
 
 change! etc. 
 
 7 Marching : Galop step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, -Lesson 14 
 
 (complete). 
 
 8 Arms-forward and upward — raise ! Sideward and downward — sink ! 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 
 1 March Lessons : Change step ; Double Change step ; Galop step ; and 
 Polka step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 15. 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 1 General Review. 
 
83 
 
 GRADE V. 
 
 Before beginning the regular lesson it will be found necessary to spend 
 some time in the review of the preliminary exercises and commands used most 
 frequently in the everyday w^)rk. Sec Rising Exercises and Routine for 
 Beginning and Closing the Lesson, on pages 49 and 50. 
 
 See Fundamental Standing Position, Fig. 1, page 7. 
 
 The exercises are to be given by command. 
 
 Arrange pupils according to sex and size. 
 
 Frequently call attention to correct sitting, standing, and walking. 
 
 Show each exercise, but do not neglect to give each its right name. 
 Demonstrate before the class for from four to six lessons, then move about the 
 room and let the class exercise by command only. 
 
 Give the "Posture Drill " {page 8) at the beginning of each lesson and 
 at various times during the lesson. 
 
 If possible take all exercises out of doors, or in the corridors. Use the 
 class room as a last resort. Jumping and marching exercises should be taken 
 outside the class room. 
 
 The rooms are to be aired while the class exercises. 
 
 Practice each exercise six, eight or ten times. 
 
 Practice each lesson for three weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 1 Attention! Left — face! Right — face! 
 
 2 Head-backward — bend ! Upward — raise ! Head-to left — twist ! For- 
 
 ward — twist ! To right — twist ! Forward — twist ! 
 
 3 Arms-sideward and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc. Arms- 
 
 upward and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Hips — firm, and feet-sideward — place! Heels — raise! Knees — bend! 
 
 Knee — stretch ! Heels — sink ! Hands-down, and feet-together — place ! 
 one ! two ! 
 
 5 Neck — firm ! Left hip, and right neck — firm ! Change ! Position ! 
 
 Arms-upward — bend! With palms up-alternate arms-sideward — 
 stretch ! Position ! 
 
 6 Wood Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, Nos. 11 and 12. 
 
 7 Marching: March forward and halt. See Class Room Tactics, page 19, 
 
 Lesson 2 (a). 
 March backward and halt. See Class Room Tactics, page 19, 
 Lesson 2 (b). 
 
 8 Arms-sideward and upward — raise ! Sideward and downward — sink. 
 Note. — The last exercise should always be a breathing exercise. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-forward — place ! Feet — change ! one ! two ! 
 Position! Left— face ! Half left— face ! Half left— face ! Right- 
 face! Half right— face! Right— face ! Half left— face ! 
 
 2 Hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Forward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Head-to left — twist ! Backward — bend ! Raise ! Forward and to 
 right — twist! Backward — bend! Raise! Forward — twist! Position! 
 
 3 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! Forward-fling! Position! 
 
 4 Left leg-forward — raise ! Sink ! Right leg-forward — raise ! Sink ! 
 Note. — Toes should be pointed and well stretched. 
 
 5 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Head 
 
 rotation— one ! two! three! four! (NoTE.--Same as head-to left, for- 
 ward, right, forward — twist!) Trunk — raise! Position! Left arm- 
 sideward, and right arm-upward — stretch ! Arms — change ! one ! two ! 
 Pos.ition ! 
 
 6 Left hip, and right neck — firm ! Trunk-to left — bend ! Raise ! Arms — > 
 
 change ! To right — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
84 
 
 7 In place — jump! one! two! three! four! five! six! (See page 17, 
 
 No. 11.) Left foot-forward — place! Heels — raise! In quick time-feet 
 — change! one! two! one! two! Class — halt!, one! two! three! four! 
 Position ! 
 
 8 Marching: March forward and backward. See Class Room Tactics, 
 page 19, Lesson 3. 
 
 9 Hips — firm! Shoulders-backward — move! Forward— move ! 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-outward — place ! Feet-change ! one ! two ! Posi- 
 
 tion ! 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm! Trunk-backward— bend ! Trunk 
 
 -forward — ^bend! Raise! Position! 
 
 3 Climb Rope Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 7. 
 
 4 Arms-forward, and heels— raise ! Knees—bend ! Knees — stretch ! Arms, 
 
 and heels — sink ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward and backward — stretch! Bend! Stretch! etc. Down- 
 
 ward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 6 Left foot-outward — place, and hips — ^firm ! Trunk-to left — twist I 
 
 Forward^twist ! Feet— change ! 1-2. Trunk-to right — twist! etc. 
 
 7 Marching. Follow step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 11 
 
 (complete). 
 
 Galop step forward. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 14 
 (complete). 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling, and heels — raise! (Inhale.) 
 
 Arms-bend, and heels — sink! (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 1 Attention! Two steps-forward — iharch ! (Left, right, left.) Left — face! 
 
 Two steps-to left — march ! Right-about — face ! Half-right — face ! 
 Half-right — face ! Left-about — face ! 
 
 2 Head-to left — bend ! Raise ! To right — bend ! Raise ! Head-back- 
 
 ward—bend ! Raise ! 
 
 3 Arms'-forward and upward — stretch I Downward— stretch ! 
 
 4 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm ! Heels — raise ! Knees — bend ! 
 
 Stretch ! Sink ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-forward and upward — fling! Neck — firm! Position! 
 
 6 Wood Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 12. 
 
 7 Heels — raise ! Quick time-in place — march ! The same as running in 
 
 place. 
 
 8 Marching: Follow step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 11 
 
 (complete). 
 
 9 Arms-sideward— raise ! Hands — turn! Arms and heels — raise! (In- 
 
 hale.) Arms-sideward, and heels — sink! (Exhale.) Position! 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 1 Attention! Alternate heels and toes — raise! one! two! three four! 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place;, and neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise I 
 
 Position! 
 
 3 Throw the Lasso F*lay. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 9. 
 
 4 Hips — firm! Left knee-upward — ^bend ! Forward — stretch! Bend I 
 
 Knees- — change ! one ! two ! Right knee-forward — stretch! Position I 
 
 5 Arms-forward— bend ! Trunk-forward — bend! Arms-sideward — fling! 
 
 Bend! Fling! Trunk — raise! Position! 
 
 6 Right arm-upward— stretch, and feet — close ! Trunk-to left — bend I 
 
 Raise ! Arms — change ! . Trunk-to right — bend ! Raise ! Position I 
 
 7 Heels — raise! Stride— jump ! one! two! one! two! , See page 18, No. 16. 
 
 8 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, Nos. 5 and 6 (a). 
 
 9 Arms-sideward and upward, and heels — raise IvntSidt^ard and downward, 
 
 and heels — sink ! rrl -^ ufx.; i 
 
85 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 
 1 Attention! Marching: March forward and backward. See Class Room 
 
 Tactics, page 19, Lessson 3. 
 
 2 Head-to left — twist! To left — bend! (Toward pupils' back.) Head — 
 
 raise ! Forward, and to right^ — twist ! To right — ^bend ! Raise ! For- 
 ward — twist ! Arms-sideward — raise ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Trunk 
 forward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-sideward, forward, upward, and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Marching: Change step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 12 
 
 (complete). 
 
 5 Arms-half forward — bend ! Arm-rotation — one ! two ! Position ! 
 
 6 Arms-upward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk backward — 
 
 bend ! Trunk — raise ! Arms-downward — stretch, and feet-together — 
 place ! 
 
 7 Li place — jump! one! two! three! — four! five! six! See page 17, Xo. 11. 
 
 8 Shoulder-circling — one ! two ! three ! 
 
 Lesson VH. 
 
 1 Attention! Half left— face ! Tiight— face ! Half right— face ! Left- 
 
 about — face ! Right — face ! 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Raise ! etc. Position I 
 
 3 Arms-sideward, backward, and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Left foot-outward — place ! Heels — raise ! Sink ! Feet — change ! 1-2, etc. 
 
 5 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm! Trunk-forward — bend! Raise! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6 Sit on desk — place ! Hips — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! Forward and 
 
 to right — twist ! Forward — twist ! Position ! See Starting Positions, 
 page 12, No. 10. 
 
 7 Marching: Polka step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 15 
 
 (complete). 
 
 8 Arms-upward — bend! With palms up-arms slowly sideward — stretch! 
 
 (Inhale.) Arms — bend! (Exhale.) Position! 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-forward — place, and arms-forward — raise ! Arms 
 
 and feet — change ! two ! Position ! 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Left arm-sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Arms — change ! one ! 
 
 two ! Both arms-upward and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 etc. 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Left knee-upward — ^bend ! Forward — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Knees — change ! one ! two ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-sideward — raise! Arms-swimming movements — one! two! and 
 
 three ! See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 14. 
 
 6 Play Ball : Pitch and bat ball with left and right hand. See page 52, 
 
 No. 13. 
 
 7 From place-forward — jump! one! two! three — four! five! six! 
 
 8 Form in a double circle ! Boy on the left and girl on the right. Partners 
 
 face forward, join inside hands, outside hand on the hip. Polka step 
 forward. Begin with outside foot and alternating feet. Four steps 
 forward with each foot. Then take heel and toe polka, bending back- 
 ward, placing heel forward on the floor on one, and bending forward 
 with toe touching floor in the rear on two. Polka forward one ! two ! 
 three ! four ! and alternate. Take it four times left and four times 
 right, and repeat all. For " Heel and Toe " polka, see Rhythmical 
 Steps, page 23. Lesson 19 (b). Take in single file if it is impossible 
 to work in couples. 
 
 9 Arms-sideward — raise! Arms-circling — one! two! three! 
 
86 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 1 Attention ! Two steps-backward — march ! Right-about — face ! Two 
 
 steps-backward — march ! Left-about — face ! 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise, and feet — close ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward, backward, upward and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Left leg-backward — raise ! Sink ! Right leg — raise ! Sink ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-forward — 
 
 bend ! Head-rotation — one ! two ! three ! four ! Trunk — raise ! Arms- 
 downward — stretch, and feet-together — place ! 
 
 6 Neck — firm, and feet — close ! Trunk-to left — bend ! Raise ! To right — 
 
 bend! Raise! Position! 
 
 7 Left foot-forward — place ! Heels — raise ! In quick time— change ! 
 
 8 Bean Bags. See School Room Games, page 51, Nos. 6 (a) and 7. 
 
 9 Hips — firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! Forward — move ! Position ! 
 
 Lesson X. 
 
 1 Left foot-sideward — place ! Heels — raise ! Sink ! Feet — change ! 1-2. 
 
 Heels — raise ! Sink ! Repeat in series one ! two ! three ! four ! Position. 
 
 2 Neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! Arms-side- 
 
 ways — raise, and left foot-forward — place ! Trunk-backward — bend ! 
 Raise ! Arms and feet — change ! etc. 
 
 3 Climb Rope. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 7. 
 
 4 Arms-forward and upward, and heels — raise ! Forward and downward, 
 
 and heels — sink ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward and backward — stretch ! Position ! 
 
 6 Left foot-outward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! For- 
 
 ward — twist ! Repeat four times. Feet — change !, Trunk-to right — 
 twist ! Forward — twist ! Repeat four times. 
 
 7 Marching: Galop step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 14 
 
 (complete). 
 
 8 Arms-forward — raise ! Sideward — fling ! Forward — fling ! 
 
 Lesson XI. 
 
 1 Attention ! Marching. March forward and backward. See Class Room 
 
 Tactics, page 19, Lesson 3. 
 
 2 Arms-sideward— raise ! Head-to left — twist! Head-backward — bend! 
 
 Raise ! Forward and to right — twist ! Backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-backward, forward, upward, and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Left foot-forward — place ! Right heel — raise ! Sink ! Both heels — raise ! 
 
 Sink! Feet — change! 1-2. Left-heel— raise ! Sink! Both heels — 
 raise ! Sink ! Position ! 
 
 5 Left arm-sideward, and right arm-upward — stretch ! Arms — change ! 
 
 1-2. Both arms-sideward and downward — stretch ! 
 
 6 Wood Play : Splitting and sawing wood. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, 
 
 Nos. 11 and 12. 
 
 7 Heels — raise! Quick time-in place — march! (Running in place.) 
 
 8 Polka, and Heel and Toe Polka. Repeat No. 8, Lesson VIII, Grade V. 
 
 9 Shoulder-circling — one ! two ! three ! 
 
 Lesson XII. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left-face, and one step-to left — march ! one ! two ! three ! 
 
 four! Right-face, and one step-forward — march! 
 
 2 Hips— firm! Head-backward— bend ! Head— circling! (Left, forward, 
 
 right, backward, and reverse.) Head — raise! Position! Feet-side- 
 ward — place, and hips— firm ! Trunk-backward— bend ! Raise! Position! 
 
 3 Bow and Arrow Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 8. 
 
87 
 
 4 Hips— firm! Left leg-upward — bend! Leg— stretch ! Bend! Change! 
 
 etc. 
 
 5 Arms-half forward — ^bend ! Arm-rotation — one ! two ! Neck — firm ! 
 
 Position! 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm ! Trunk-to left — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 To right — bend ! Rais€ ! Position ! 
 
 7 Heels — raise! Stride — jump! See page 18, No. 16. 
 
 8 Bean Bags. See Lesson IX, No. 8, Grade V. 
 
 9 Arms-upward — bend ! With palms up, arms slowly sideward — stretch ! 
 
 (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) Position! 
 
 Lesson XIII. 
 
 1 Attention ! Number off by twos ! No. ones-one step forward, and 
 
 No. twos-one step-backward — march ! Ones and twos — change — 
 march ! one ! two ! three ! (Alternate rows are numbers one and two.) 
 
 2 Left foot-forward — place, and neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! 
 
 Forward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-upward — bend ! With palms up, alternate arms-sideward — stretch ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4 Left foot-forward — place, and hips — firm ! Heels — raise ! Knees — bend ! 
 
 Knees — stretch ! Heels — sink ! Feet — change ! etc. 
 
 5 Hips — firm ! Left knee-upward — bend ! Backward — ^stretch ! Down- 
 
 ward — place ! Position ! 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and arms-forward — bend ! Trunk-forward — bend ! 
 
 Arms-sideward — fling! Bend! Fling! Trunk — raise! Arms — sink, 
 and feet-together — place ! one ! two ! 
 
 7 Sit on desk — place! Neck — firm! Trunk to left — twist! Forward, and 
 
 to right — twist ! Forward — twist ! Position ! See page 12, No. 10. 
 
 8 Left (right) — face! Hands on desk and back of seat — place! Jump 
 
 over chairs to count ! one ! two ! three ! four ! five ! six ! 
 
 9 Alarching: Change Hop. See Rhvthmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 16. 
 10 Arms-sideward, and heels — raise! Sink! 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 
 1 Attention ! Neck — firm ! Heels — raise ! Knees — bend ! Stretch ! Sink ! 
 
 Position! 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise ! Head-to left — twist ! Head-backward — bend ! 
 
 Raise ! Forward and to right — twist ! etc. 
 
 3 Arms-forward, backward, upward, and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Left (right) — face! Hands on desk — place! Alternate leg swimming 
 
 movement — one ! two ! and three ! 
 
 5 Trunk-forward — bend ! Arms-swimming movement — one ! two ! and 
 
 three ! Trunk — raise ! Position ! See Imaginary Plavs, page 52, 
 No. 14. 
 
 6 Golf Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 13. 
 
 7 Marching. Galop step and Polka step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 
 
 22, Lessons 14 and 15 (complete). 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 
 1 Attention! Two steps-forward and left face — march! (One! two I 
 
 three! four! five!) Two steps-to left, and right face — march! (One! 
 two! three! four! five! six!) 
 
 2 Neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward — bend ! Left foot-forward — place, and arms-sideward — 
 
 fling ! Arms — bend, and foot — replace ! Arms — fling, and right foot- 
 forward — place ! etc. In series of four counts. 
 
 4 Marching. Change Hop. See Lesson XIH, No. 9. 
 
 5 Arms-sideward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-forward — 
 
 bend! Arm-rotation — one! two! Trunk — raise! Position! 
 
 6 General review of marching lessons. 
 
GRADE VI. 
 
 Before beginning the regular lesson it will be found necessary to spend 
 some time in review of the preliminary exercises and commands used most 
 frequently in the every day work. See Rising Exercises and Routine for 
 Beginning and Closing the Lesson, on pages 49 and 50. 
 
 See Fundamental Standing Position, Fig. 1, page 7. 
 
 The exercises are to be given by command. 
 
 Arrange pupils according to sex and size. 
 
 Frequently call attention to correct sitting, standing and walking. 
 
 Show each exercise, but do not neglect to give each its right name. Demon- 
 strate before the class for from four to six lessons, then move about the room 
 and let the class exercise by command only. 
 
 Give the "Posture Drill" {page 8)' at the beginning of each lesson and 
 at various times during the lesson. 
 
 If possible take all exercises out of doors or in the corridors. Use the class 
 room as a last resort. Jumping and marching exercises should be taken outside 
 the class room. 
 
 The rooms are to be aired while the class exercises. 
 
 Practice each exercise six, eight, or ten times. 
 
 Practice each lesson for three weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left — face ! Right — face ! Left-about — face ! Right-about 
 
 — face ! 
 
 2 Head-backward— bend ! Head — raised ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 3 Arms-sideward, upward, and downward — stretch! Bend! stretch! Bend! 
 
 Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Heels — raise ! Knees — bend ! Knees — stretch ! Heels — sink ! 
 
 5 Neck — firm ! Hips — firm ! Left-hip, and right-neck — firm ! Change ! 
 
 1-2. Position ! 
 
 6 Trunk-to left — bend ! Raise ! To right — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 7 Marching: March forward and backward. See Class Room Tactics, 
 
 page 19, Lesson 3. 
 
 8 Arms-sideward and upward — raise! Sideward and downward — sink! 
 
 Note. — The last exercise should always be a breathing exercise. 
 
 Lesson IL 
 
 1 Attention! Alternate toes— raise! 1-2-3-4. Halt! Feet— close! Open! 
 
 Marching: Left (right) about — face! See Class Room Tactics, page 
 19, Less son 5 (a). 
 
 2 Head-to left — twist! Forward and to right — twist! Forward — twist! 
 
 Backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 3 Climb Rope Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 7. 
 
 4 Left knee-upward — bend! Knees— change ! one ! two ! Position! 
 
 5 Hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! Arms-half 
 
 forward — bend! Arms — -rotate! one! (Now the arms shall be per- 
 pendicular upward from the elbow; this is called arms-half sideward — 
 bend!) two ! one ! two! Position! 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Trunk-to left — twist! Forward and to right — twist! Forward — twist! 
 Position ! (Come to position with a light jump.) 
 
 7 Heels — raise! Stride — jump! one! two! one! two! (The same as feet 
 
 sideward and together place with a jump.) Class — halt! one! two! 
 three! four! Heels — sink! In place — jump! one! two! three^ — four! 
 five ! six ! 
 Note. — Take these jumping exercises only in the basement playroom, cor- 
 ridors or out of doors. See page 17, Lesson 11. 
 
 8 Marching: Change step. See Rhythrnical Steps, page 22, Lesson 12 
 
 (complete). 
 
9 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) 
 Position ! Arms-sideward, and heels — raise ! Sink ! 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 1 Attention! Arms-forward and upward, and heels — raise! Forward 
 
 and downward, and heels — sink ! 
 Marching: March forward and backward. Left (right) about — face! 
 Left (right) about — halt! (The same as Left (right) about — face! 
 but on three place right (left) foot to the left (right) and stand still.) 
 See Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lessons 3 and 5 (complete). 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise. Trunk-backward — bend! Raise! Position! 
 
 Head-to left — twist ! Backward — bend ! Raise ! Forward and to 
 right — twist! Backward — bend! Raise! Forward — twist! Position! 
 
 3 Arms-backward, upward, and downward — stretch ! Arms-forward — 
 
 fling ! Upward — stretch ! Sideward — sink ! Downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Neck — firm ! Heels — raise ! Knees — bend ! Stretch ! Bend !■ Stretch ! 
 
 Heels — sink ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-half sideward — bend! Slowly upward — stretch! Neck — firm! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6 Right arm-upward — stretch, and feet — close ! Trunk-to left — bend ! 
 
 Raise ! Arms — change ! To right — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 7 Wood Play: Splitting wood. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 12. 
 
 From place-forward — jump! one! two! three — four! five! six! See 
 page 17, No. 13. 
 
 8 Marching. Change step sideward with turning about forward. The 
 
 same with turning about backward. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, 
 Lesson 13 (a) and (b). 
 
 9 Arms-upward — bend ! With palms up-arms-slowly sideward — stretch ! 
 
 (Inhale.) Arms — bend! (Exhale.) Position! 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 1 Attention ! Half-right— face ! Right— face ! Left-about— face ! Half- 
 
 left — face! Dress — right! Front! Arms-forward, and heels — raise! 
 Arms-upward — raise, and knees — bend ! Arms-forward — sink, and 
 knees — stretch ! Arms and heels — sink ! 
 
 2 Hips — firm! Head-backward — bend! Head-circling — left! Forward! 
 
 right ! backward ! Reversed ! Head — raise ! Feet-sideward — place, and 
 neck — firm! Trunk-backward — bend! Raise! Position! 
 
 3 Arms-upward — bend ! Alternate arms-upward — stretch ! Both arms- 
 
 upward and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Left leg-backward — raise ! Legs — change ! 1-2, etc. Left 
 
 knee-upward — bend ! Forward — stretch ! Bend ! Change ! 1-2, etc. 
 
 5 Arms-forward — bend! Trunk-forward — bend! Arms-sideward — fling! 
 
 Bend! Fling! Trunk — raise! Neck — firm! Position! Arms-side- 
 ward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-forward — bend ! 
 Arms^rotation ! Trunk — raise ! Position ! 
 
 6 Sit on desk — place ! Hips — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! Forward and 
 
 to right — twist ! Forward — twist ! Position ! See page 12, No. 10. 
 
 7 Marching: Polka step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 15 
 
 (complete). 
 
 8 Arms-sideward — stretch! Hands — turn! Arms and heels — raise! (In- 
 
 hale.) Arms-sideward, and heels — sink! (Exhale.) Position. 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left — face, and one step-to left — march ! Right — face, and 
 
 one step-forward — march ! 
 
 2 Arms-sideward, and heels — raise! Alternate-head — rotation — one! two! 
 
 one! two! Forward — twist! Position! Trunk-backward-^bend ! 
 Raise ! 
 
90 
 
 3 Climb Rope Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 7. 
 
 4 Left foot-forward — place, and neck — firm ! Right-heel — raise ! Sink ! 
 
 Both heels — raise ! Sink ! Feet — change ! Left heel — raise ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-half forward — bend ! Arm-rotation ! etc. 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm ! Trunk-to left — bend, etc. 
 
 7 Left foot-forward — place! Heels — raise! In quick time-change — one! 
 
 two! one! two! Class — halt! one! two! three! four! Position! 
 
 8 Marching: Left (right) about— Face ! (b) Left (right) about— Halt! 
 
 See Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lesson 5 (complete). 
 
 9 Arrns-sideward — raise! Arms-circling — one! two! three! Arms — sink! 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 
 1 Attention ! Number off by twos. Left — face ! Number off by twos 1 
 
 (Always begin at the right end of the line.) Right- — face and two 
 steps-forward — march ! Right-face, and two steps-to right — march ! 
 Left — face. 
 
 2 Left foot-forward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! 
 
 Raise ! Feet — change ! etc. 
 
 3 Bow and Arrow Plays. See Imaginary Plays, page 51, No. 8. 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Heels — raise ! Knees-deep — bend ! Knees — stretch ! Heels 
 
 — sink ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Head — rotation ! etc. 
 
 6 Left foot-outward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! For- 
 
 ward — twist ! Feet — change ! 1-2. Trunk-to right — twist ! etc. 
 
 7 Turning 90 deg. to left-in place — jump — one! two! three — four! five I' 
 
 six ! See page 17, No. 12. 
 
 8 Marching. Change Hop. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 9 
 
 and 16. 
 
 9 Arms-forward and upward, and heels — raise ! Sideward and downward, 
 
 and heels — sink ! 
 
 Lesson VII. 
 
 1 Attention ! Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm ! Heels — raise' ! Knees 
 
 — bend ! etc. 
 
 2 Arms-forward — bend ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Arms-sideward — fling ! 
 
 Bend! Fling! Trunk — raise! Position! 
 
 3 Left arm-forward, and, right arm-backward — stretch ! Both arms-side- 
 
 ward and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Left knee-upward — bend ! Backward — stretch ! Upward — 
 
 bend ! Knees — change ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-upward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-forward — 
 
 bend ! Raise ! Neck — firm ! Position ! 
 
 6 Wood Play : Splitting wood. See Imagainary Plays, page 52, No. 13. 
 
 7 Heels — raise ! Left knee-upward — bend ! In quick time-knees — ^change ! 
 
 one ! two ! Class — halt ! one ! two ! three ! four ! Heels — sink ! 
 
 8 Marching : Touch step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 17. 
 
 9 Hips — firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! etc. 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 
 1 Attention! Marching: Left (right) about — Face! and. Left (right) 
 
 about— Halt ! See Class Room Tactics, page 19. Lesson 5. 
 
 2 Head-to left — twist! To left^ — bend! Raise! Forward and to right — 
 
 twist! To right — bend! Raise! etc. 
 
 3 Arms-sideward, and heels — raise! Knees — bend, and arms-upward — 
 
 raise ! Knees — stretch, and arms-sideward — sink ! Arms and heels — 
 sink ! 
 
 4 Marching: Change Hop. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 9 
 
 and 16. 
 
 5 . Trunk-forward — bend! ArmS-swimming movement— one ! two! thre^!, 
 
 Trunk — raise ! Position ! See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 14. 
 
91 
 
 6 Left foot-forward — place, and right arm-upward — stretch ! Trnnk-to 
 
 left — bend! Raise! Arms and feet — change! 1-2. Trunk-to right — 
 bend ! etc. 
 
 7 Marching: Cross balance step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Les- 
 
 son 20 (a), (b), (c) and (d). 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend ! Left foot-forward — place, and arms-sideward — 
 
 fling! (Inhale.) Foot — replace, and arms — bend! (Exhale.) Right 
 foot-forward — place, and arms-sideward — fling ! etc. 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 1 Attention ! Two steps-forward, and right-face — march ! Right-face, 
 
 and two steps-forward — march ! Left-about — face ! Repeat ! 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 etc. 
 
 3 Left arm-upward, and right arm-downward — stretch ! Arms-sideward 
 
 and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Left-forward — fall out! Feet — change! 1-2. (See No. 6, page 12.) 
 
 Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-half sideward — bend ! Arm rotation — one ! two ! Neck — firm ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6 Arms-sideward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-backward — 
 
 bend, and arms-upward — raise ! Arms-sideward — sink, and trunk — 
 raise ! Position ! 
 
 7 Marching: Cross balance step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Les- 
 
 son 20 (complete). 
 
 8 Shoulder — circling! 
 
 Lesson X. 
 
 1 Attention! Marching: March forward and backward. Left (right) 
 
 about — Face ! Left (right) about — Halt ! See Class Room Tactics, 
 page 19, Lessons 3 and 5. 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Climb Rope Play : with quick change of feet. See Imaginary Plays, page 
 
 51, No. 7. 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Left leg-sideward — raise ! Sink ! Right leg-sideward — 
 
 raise! Sink! Position! 
 
 5 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm! Trunk-forward — bend! Raise! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6 Golf Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 13. 
 
 7 Marching : Change step sideways. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, 
 
 Lesson 13 (complete). 
 
 8 Arms-forward and upward — raise ! Sideward and downward — sink ! 
 
 Lesson XL 
 
 1 Attention! Marching: (1) To the left flank— halt ! (2) To the right 
 
 flank — halt ! See Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lesson 8. 
 
 2 Hips — firm! Head — circling! etc. 
 
 3 Arms-backward, sideward, upward: and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise, and left foot-forward — place! Heels — raise! 
 
 Knees — bend ! Stretch ! Sink ! Arms and feet — change ! etc. 
 
 5 Feet-sideward — place, and arms-forward — bend ! Trunk-backward — 
 
 bend ! Arms-sideward — fling ! Bend ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Arms- 
 sideward — fling ! Bend ! Fling ! Trunk — raise ! Position ! 
 
 6 Arms-upward — stretch ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Arms — bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 Trunk-raise! Position! 
 
 7 Left foot-forward — place ! Heels — raise ! Quick time — change ! etc. 
 
 8 Marching: Double touch step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Les- 
 
 son 18 (complete). 
 
 9 Arms-sideward — raise! Arms — circling! etc. 
 
92 
 
 Lesson XII. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot forward — fall out ! Feet — change ! one ! two ! 
 
 Foot — replace ! 
 
 2 Left foot-forward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! 
 
 Raise I Feet — change ! etc. 
 
 3 Heels — raise ! Arms-upward and downward — stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Left leg-forward — raise ! Legs — change ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-forward — raise ! Arms-sideward — fling ! Forward — fling ! Side- 
 
 ward — fling ! Position ! 
 
 6 Arms-upward — stretch ! Trunk-to left — bend ! Rais€ ! etc. 
 
 7 Prepare-to jump-in series — one! two — ^three ! four! (Two — three in 
 
 quick succession, and without counting.) Etc. 
 
 8 Marching : — Same as No. 1, Lesson X, Grade VI. 
 
 9 Hips^firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! etc. 
 
 Lesson XIII. 
 
 1 Attention! Half-right— face! Left-about— face ! Half-left— face ! 
 
 Right — face ! Half-right — face ! Right-about — face ! Left — face ! 
 Half-left— face'. 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm! Trunk-forward — bend! Raise! 
 
 Backward — bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Climb Rope Play, with quick change of feet. See Imaginary Plays, page 
 
 51, No. 7. 
 
 4 Half-right — face ! Left outward — fall - out ! Replace ! Right — face ! 
 
 Right outward — fall out ! Replace ! Right — face ! Left outward — fall 
 out ! Replace ! Right — face ! Right outward — fall out ! Replace ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-half sideward — bend! Slowly upward — stretch! Sideward — sink! 
 
 Half— bend! etc. 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! etc. 
 
 7 Heels — raise ! Quick time-in place — march ! etc. 
 
 8 Marching: Double touch and change step, with variations, in combina- 
 
 tions taken from Lessons 12 and 18, .pages 22 and 23, of Rhythmical 
 Steps. 
 
 9 Arms-sideward and upward— raise ! etc. 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 
 1 Attention! Left foot-sideward — place, and arms-sideward — raise! Arms 
 
 and feet — change ! one ! two ! etc. 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise ! Trunk-backward — bend, and arms — raise ! Arms 
 
 sideward — sink, and trunk — raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward, sideward, upward, backward, and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Hips — firm ! Left knee-upward^ — bend ! Forward — stretch ! Bend 1 
 
 Stretch ! Bend ! Change ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-forward — stretch! Upward — fling! Forward — sink! Fling! etc. 
 
 6 Golf Play. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 13. 
 
 7 Marching: Galop step. See Lesson XIII, No. 7, Grade IV, Rhythmical 
 
 Steps, page 22. Lesson 14 (complete). 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend ! Sideward — fling ! Bend ! etc. 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 1 Same as Lesson VIII, Grade V. 
 
GRADE VII. 
 
 Before beginning the regular lesson it will be found necessary to spend 
 some time in review of the preliminary exercises and commands used most 
 frequently in the everyday work. See Rising Exercises and Routine for 
 Beginning and Closing the Lesson, on pages 49 and 50. 
 
 See Fundamental Standing Position, Fig. 1, page 7. 
 
 The exercises are to be given by command. 
 
 Arrange pupils according to sex and size. 
 
 Frequently call attention to correct sitting, standing and walking. 
 
 Show each exercise, but do not neglect to give each its right name. Demon- 
 strate before the class for from four to six lessons, then move about the room 
 and let the class exercise by command only. 
 
 Give the "Posture Drill" (page 8) at the beginning of each lesson and 
 at .various times during the lesson. 
 
 If possible take all exercises out of doors or in the corridors. Use the class 
 room as a last resort. Jumping and marching exercises should be taken outside 
 the class room. 
 
 The rooms are to be aired while the class exercises. 
 
 Practice each exercise six, eight, or ten times. 
 
 Practice each lesson for three weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 1 Attention! Marching: Left (right) about — Face! See Class Room 
 
 Tactics, page 19, Lesson 5 (a). Right — face, and one step to left — 
 march ! Left — face, and one step backward — march ! etc. 
 
 2 Head-to left — twist ! Backward — bend ! Raise ! Forward and to right 
 
 — twist! Backward — bend! Raise! Forward— twist ! Position! 
 Trunk-backward — Bend ! Raise ! Neck — firm ! Hips — firm ! Position. 
 
 3 Left arm-forward, and right arm-sideward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 Arms — change ! one ! two ! Arms-upward and downward — stretch ! 
 Bend ! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Left leg-forward — raise ! Legs — change ! one ! two ! Position ! Hips — 
 
 firm ! Left leg-backward — raise ! Legs — change ! one ! two ! Position ! 
 
 5 Wood Play : Splitting wood. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 12. 
 
 6 Right arm-upward — stretch, and feet — close ! Trunk-to left — bend ! 
 
 Raise ! Arms — change ! Trunk-to right — bend ! Raise ! Arms-down- 
 ward — stretch, and feet — open. 
 
 7 In place — jump! one! two! three — four! five! six! See page 17, No. 11. 
 Note. — Leave out all jumping exercises, if it is impossible to take pupils 
 
 out of doors or in playroom. 
 
 8 Marching: To the left flank— halt ! To the right flank— halt ! See 
 
 Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lesson 8 (a) and (b). 
 
 9 Arms-sideward, and heels — raise ! Arms — down, and heels — sink ! 
 Note. — The last exercise should always be a breathing exercise. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 1 Attention ! Arms-forward, and heels — raise ! Arms — raise, and knees — 
 
 bend ! Arms-forward — sink, and knees — stretch ! Arms-and heels — 
 sink! Repeat in 8 counts, using two counts for each movement. 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm! Trunk-forward — bend! Head- 
 
 rotation! (Left, forward, right, forward.) Trunk — raise! Feet- 
 together — place, and hands — down ! Neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — 
 bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward, backward, and downward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Left knee-upward— bend ! Forward — stretch ! Bend ! Knees — change ! 
 
 etc. Hips — firm ! Heels — raise ! Knees-deep — bend ! Stretch ! Po- 
 sition ! 
 
 5 Arms-forward — bend! Trunk-forward — bend! Arms-sideward — fling! 
 
 Bend ! Trunk — rafse ! Position ! 
 
94 
 
 Sit on desks — place! Neck — firm! Trunk-to left — ^twist ! Forward, 
 and to right — twist ! Forward — twist ! Position ! See page 12, No. 10. 
 
 From place- for ward — jump! one! two! three — four! five! six! See page 
 17, No. 13. Left foot-forward — place! Heels — raise! In quick time 
 — change ! one ! two ! one ! two ! Class — halt ! one ! two ! three ! four ! 
 Position ! 
 
 Marching: Touch step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 17 
 (complete). 
 
 Arms-upward — bend ! With palms up-arms-slowly, sideward — stretch ! 
 Bend! Stretch! Bend! Position! 
 
 Lesson IH, 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot — sideward — place, and arms-sideward — raise ! Arms 
 
 and feet — change ! one ! two ! 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! one ! two ! Trunk- 
 
 backward — bend ! Raise ! Arms-down, and feet-together — ^place ! one ! 
 two ! ' 
 
 3 Left arm-sideward, and right arm-upward — stretch ! Arms — changed ! 
 
 one ! two ! Arms-downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Left leg and arm-sideward — raise ! Arms and feet — change ! one ! two ! 
 
 Arms and legs — sink ! Left foot-forward — place ! Right heel — raise ! 
 Sink ! Both heels — raise ! Sink ! Feet — change ! one ! two ! Left 
 heel — raise ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms swimming movemnt ! one ! two ! and three ! See Imaginary Plays, 
 
 page 52, No. 14. 
 
 6 ArmsyUpward — stretch, and feet-sideward^^place ! Trunk-backward — 
 
 bend! Raise! Forward and downward — bend! (Keep the knees 
 straight.) Forward and upward — raise! Arms-downward — stretch, 
 and feet-together — place ! 
 
 7 Marching: Double touch step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Les- 
 
 son 18 (complete). 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend! Heels — raise, and arms-sideward — fling! (In- 
 
 hale.) Arms — bend, and heels — sink! (Exhale.) Position! 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 1 Left-face, one step-to left, and right face — march ! Right-face, one step- 
 
 to left, and left-face — march ! etc. 
 
 2 Left foot-forward — place, and arms-sideward — raise ! Trunk-backward 
 
 — bend ! Raise ! Arms and feet — change ! Repeat, etc. 
 Hips — firm ! Head-backward — bend ! Head-circling — left ! forward ! 
 right! Backward! Reverse! Head raise! Position! 
 
 3 Wood Play: Splitting wood. See previous lesson. Heels — raise! 
 
 Knees — ^bend ! Arms-upward and downward — stretch! Knees — 
 stretch ! Heels — sink ! Position ! 
 
 4 Left-forward — fall out ! See page 12, No. 6. Feet — change ! one ! two ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-half forward — bend ! Arm-rotation ! one ! two ! Position ! 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — ^bend ! Trunk- 
 
 circling — left ! backward ! right ! forward ! Reverse ! Trunk — raise ! 
 Position ! See page 15, No. 5. 
 
 7 Stride — jump! In place — jump! See page 17, Nos. 11 and 16. 
 
 8 Marching: Double touch and change step. In combinations taken from 
 
 Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 12 and 18. 
 To the left flank— halt ! To the right flank— halt! See Class Room 
 Tactics, page 19, Lesson 8 (a) and (b). 
 
 9 Arms-forward and upward, and heels — raise ! Sideward and down- 
 
 ward, and heels — sink! 
 
95 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 1 Attention! Marching: March forward and backward. See Class 
 
 Room Tactics, page 19, Lesson 3. 
 Left (right) about — Face! See Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lesson 5 
 (a) and take also 5 (b). 
 
 2 Left — face ! Number ofif by twos ! Right — face ! Number off by twos ! 
 
 Left — face ! Number off by twos ! Right — face ! Number twos ready 
 to support, and number ones-neck — firm ! Number ones trunk-back- 
 ward — bend ! Raise ! Repeat and reverse. Number twos — support ! 
 (by grasping the elbows of number ones). 
 Note. — -Number twos ready to support — they place one foot forward and 
 raise their arms so as to grasp the elbows of the one in front and 
 support him from falling backward. See page 12, No. 11. 
 
 3 Left arm-forward and upward — fling ! Arms — change ! Both arms- 
 
 sideward, upward, and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Golf Plays. See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 13. 
 
 5 Feet-sideward — place! Trunk-forward — bend! Arms-forward, and up- 
 
 ward — raise ! Forward and downward — sink ! Trunk — raise, and feet- 
 together — place ! 
 
 6 Deep knee-bend-kneel — down ! Hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! 
 
 Raise! Bend! Raise! Position! (Use a piece of paper to kneel on.) 
 
 7 Marching : Cross balance step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, 
 
 Lesson 20 (a), (b), (c), (d). 
 
 8 Shoulder circling! etc. 
 
 Lesson VL 
 
 1 Attention! One step-forward, right — face, and one step-to the right — 
 
 march ! One step-to the left, left — face, and one step-backward — 
 march ! etc. 
 
 2 Left foot-forward — place, and neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! 
 
 Raise! Position! Arms-upward — stretch! Trunk-backward — bend! 
 etc. 
 
 3 Heels — raise, and arms-upward — bend ! Arms-upward — stretch, and 
 
 trunk-backward — bend ! Trunk — raise, and arms — bend ! etc. 
 Heels — raise, and arms-upward — bend ! Knees — bend, and arms-upward 
 — stretch ! Arms — bend, and knees — stretch ! Position ! 
 
 4 Half right — face ! Left-outward — fall out ! Replace ! Left — face and 
 
 right-outward — fall out! etc. See page 12, No. 5. 
 
 5 Arms-sideward — stretch, " and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-forward — 
 
 bend! Arm — rotation! etc. See page 15, No. 7. 
 
 6 Sit on desk — place I Hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Position I 
 
 7 Heels — raise I In quick time-in place — march ! 
 
 8 Marching: Cross balance step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Les- 
 
 son 20 (complete). 
 
 9 Hips — firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! Forward — move ! Position ! 
 
 Lesson VII. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left-forward — fall out ! Change ! Position ! 
 
 2 Same as exercise 2, Lesson V. Grade VII, but with feet-sideways — 
 
 place ! 
 
 3 Heels-raise ! Arms-sideward, forward, upward, and downward 
 
 stretch ! Position ! 
 
 4 Trunk-forward — bend ! Arms swimming movement ! one I two ! and 
 
 three ! Position ! See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 14. 
 
 5 Trunk-forward — bend! Arms-forward — raise! Arms-upward — fling! 
 
 Forward — sink! Fling! Sink! Position! 
 
 6 Arms-forward— bend, and feet— close ! Trunk-to left— twist, and arms- 
 
 sideward— fling ! Trunk-forward— twist, and arms— bend! Same to 
 right 1 
 
96 
 
 7 Marching : Column to left-by one — march ! Column to right by one — 
 
 march ! See Class Room Tactics, page 20, Lesson 10. 
 
 8 Arms-upward — bend ! Trunk-forward — bend ! With palms up, arms- 
 
 slowly-upward — stretch ! etc. 
 
 Lesson VIIL 
 
 1 Attention ! Left-about — face, half-left — face, right — face, and half-left — 
 
 face ! etc. 
 
 2 , Arms-forward — bend, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-backward — 
 
 bend ! Arms-sideward — fling ! etc. 
 
 3 Heels — raise ! Knees-deep — bend ! Arms-forward, upward, and down- 
 
 ward — stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Marching: Rocking steps. At one, step forward with left foot, and let 
 
 the body incline forward while the right foot is slightly raised back- 
 ward; at two, place right foot down (in rear), incline the body back- 
 ward ; at two, place right foot slightly forward ; at three, place left foot 
 down as in regular marching. Then begin with the right foot. 
 
 (b) The same, but with a light hop on the first and second counts. 
 
 (c) The same, but with two hops. 
 
 5 Arms-half-forward — bend! Arm — rotation! one! two! one! Trunk- 
 
 forward — bend ! Arm — rotation ! one ! two ! etc. 
 
 6 Arms-upward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-to left — twist I 
 
 etc. 
 
 7 With one step-forward-jump — one! two — three! four! five! See page 
 
 17, No. 15. 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend! Arms-flinging sideward, and feet-placing-for- 
 
 ward-in series — one ! two ! one ! two ! etc. 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 i Attention ! Half-right — face ! Knees — bend ! Left foot-outward — 
 place ! Replace ! Knees — stretch ! Left — face ! etc, 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise, and left foot-forward — place! Trunk-backward 
 
 — bend! etc. 
 
 3 Hands on desk — place ! Legs-backward — stretch ! Replace ! Forward — 
 
 stretch ! Replace ! etc. 
 
 4 Half-right — face ! Hips — firm, and left-outward — fall out ! Left-heel — 
 
 raise ! Sink ! Repeat and to the opposite side. 
 
 5 Arms-upward — bend! Trunk-forward — bend! Arms-upward — stretch! 
 
 Bend ! Stretch ! Trunk — raise ! Neck — firm ! Position ! 
 
 6 Arms-upward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-to left — ^bend ! 
 
 Raise ! etc. 
 
 7 Marching: Cross balance step. See previous lesson. 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Arms-sideward — fling ! 
 
 Bend ! etc. 
 
 Lesson X. 
 
 1 Attention! Marching: March forward and backward. Left (right) 
 
 about— Face! Left (right) about— Halt ! To the left flank— halt! To 
 the right flank— halt ! 
 See previous lesson. 
 
 2 The same as No. 2, Lesson V, Grade VH, with feet-sideward — place, 
 
 and heels — raise and sink ! 
 
 3 Left-forward — fall out ! Arms-sideward, upward and downward — 
 
 stretch ! Feet — change ! etc. 
 
 4 Wood Play : Splitting wood. 
 
 5 Sit on desk — place ! Neck — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! raise ! Bend ! 
 
 Trunk — ^circling ! etc. 
 
 6 Feet-sideward^^place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Trunk — 
 
 circling! etc. 
 
97 
 
 7 Stride — jump ! etc. 
 
 8 JNIarching: Double touch step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 
 
 18 (complete). 
 
 9 Shoulders — circling ! etc. 
 
 Lesson XL 
 
 1 Attention ! Arms-sideward, and heeTs~ — raise ! Knees — bend ! Alternate 
 
 head — rotation ! etc. 
 
 2 HipS' — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Forward and to right — twist ! etc. 
 
 3 Arms-forward, backward, sideward, upward and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Neck — firm ! Left knee-upward — bend ! Backward — stretch ! Upward- 
 
 bend ! Change ! etc. 
 
 5 Left-backward — fall out ! Change ! etc. 
 
 6 Sit on desk — place ! Hips — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! etc. 
 
 7 Golf Play. 
 
 8 With forward flinging of arms-forward — jump ! etc. Marching review. 
 
 9 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Hands-turn ! Arms and heels — raise ! 
 
 Arms-sideward, arud heels — sink ! etc. 
 
 Lesson XH. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left-face, and one step-to left — march ! Right-face, and 
 
 one step forward — march! Dress — right! Front! See page 20, (A). 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and arms-upward — stretch 1 Trunk-backward — 
 
 bend ! Arms — 'bend, and trunk — raise ! Arms-stretch, and trunk- 
 backward — bend ! etc. 
 
 3 Hands on desk — place ! Legs-backward — place 1 Forward — place ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise, and left foot-forward — place I Heels — raise ! 
 
 Knees — bend ! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-forward — bend ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Arms-sideward — fling ! 
 
 Bend! etc. 
 
 6 Hips — firm ! Left-forward — fall out ! Right-knee-on floor — support I 
 
 Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Bend ! etc. 
 
 7 Sit on desk — place ! Neck — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! Forward, and 
 
 to right — twist ! Forward — twist ! Position I 
 
 8 Marching: Column to left (or right) by one — march! 
 March forward and backward ! 
 
 Left (right) about — Face! and Left (right) about — Halt! 
 See previous lessons. 
 
 9 Arms-sideward — raise! Arms-circling! etc. 
 
 Lessons XHI, XIV and XV. 
 
 For the Girls: — See List of Folk Dances, page 25. 
 For the Boys: — Standing broad jump. 
 
 Chinning. ^ \ ' '^\ 
 
 Class running. 
 
 Combination dip. — Under the supervision of the director. 
 
 Trunk lifting. 
 
98 
 
 GRADE VIII. 
 
 Before beginning the regular lesson it will be found necessary to spend 
 some time in review of the preliminary exercises and commands used most 
 frequently in the everyday work. See Rising Exercises and Routine for Begin- 
 ning and Closing the Lesson, on pages 49 and 50. 
 
 See Fundamental Standing Position, Fig. 1, page 7. 
 
 The exercises are to be given by command. 
 
 Arrange pupils according to sex and size. 
 
 Frequently call attention to correct sitting, standing and walking. 
 
 Show each exercise, but do not neglect to give each its right name. Demon- 
 strate before the class for from four to six lessons, then move about the room 
 and let the' class exercise by command only. 
 
 Give the " Postufe Drill " (page 8)' at the beginning of each lesson and 
 at various tim^s during the lesson. 
 
 If possible take all exercises out of doors or in the corridors. Use the class 
 room as a last resort. Jumping and marching exercises should be taken outside 
 the class room. 
 
 The rooms are to be aired while the class exercises. 
 
 Practice each exercise six, eight or ten times. 
 
 Practice each lesson for three weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left-face, and one step-to left — march ! Right-face and 
 
 one step forward — march! Right — dress! Front! (See page 20, (A). 
 
 2 Feet-sideward — place, and arms-sideward — stretch ! Trunk-backward — 
 
 bend ! Raise ! Arms-downward — ^stretch, and feet-together — place ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward, sideward, upward, and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 Neck-firm ! Heels-raise ! Knees-bend Knees-stretch ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arms-forward — ^bend ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Arms-sideward — fling ! 
 
 Bend ! Fling ! Bend ! Trunk — raise ! Position ! 
 
 6 Sit on desk — place! (See page 12, No. 10.) Neck-firm! Trunk-to left 
 
 — twist ! Forward, and to right — twist ! Forward — twist ! Position I 
 
 7 Marching : March forward and backward. Slow march. Change from 
 Normal to Slow march. Left (right) about — Face! and Left (right) 
 
 about — Halt! (See Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lessons 3, 4 and 5.) 
 
 8 Arms-forward and upward — raise! (Inhale.) Sideward and downward 
 
 — sink! (Exhale.) 
 The last exercise is always a breathing exercise. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 1 Attention! Left foot-forward — place, and arms forward — raise, on one! 
 
 Left foot-sideward — place, and arms-sideward— fling, on two !' Return 
 to first position on three! Fundamental position on four! First the 
 left foot, then the right — one ! two ! three ! four ! 
 
 2 Neck — firm! Trunk-backward — bend! Trunk-forward— bend ! Raise! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3 Left arm-sideward, and right arm-upward — stretch ! Arms — change ! 
 
 One ! Two ! Repeat several times. Both arms upward and down- 
 ward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Arms-sideward — raise ! Left leg-forward — raise ! Arms and legs- 
 
 change ! One ! Two ! etc. Neck-firm ! Left leg-backward — raise ! 
 Legs — change ! One ! Two ! 
 
 5 Sit on desk — place! Neck-firm! Trunk-forward — bend! Raise! 
 
 Bend ! Raise ! Position ! 
 
 6 Wood Play: Chopping wood. (See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 12.) 
 
 7 In place — jump! one! two! three — four! five! six! Heels— raise ! 
 
 Stride — jump! One! two! one! two! Class — halt! One! two! three! 
 four! See page 17, Lessons 11 and 16. 
 
99 
 
 8 Marching Lesson : To the left' flank, Halt ; to the right flank, Halt ! 
 
 (See Class Room Tactics, page 19, No. 8.) 
 Change Hop. (See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lessons 8. 9 and 16.) 
 
 9 Arms-forward — bend! Sideward — fling! (Lihale.) Bend! (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson IH. 
 
 1 Attention ! Marching : Change from forward to backward and from 
 
 forward to Left (right) about — Face! 
 Arms-sideward and heels — raise! Arms-raise, and knees — bend! Knees — 
 stretch, and arms-sideward — sink! Arms-raise and heels — sink! Re- 
 peat in four counts. 
 
 2 Feet-sideward place, and neck — firm! Trunk-backward — bend! Trunk — 
 
 raise ! etc. 
 Hips — firm ! Head-backward — bend ! Head — circling ! Left ! Forward ! 
 Right ! Backward ! Reverse ! Head — raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward, upward, sideward and downward — stretch ! 
 
 4 X-eft foot-forward — place, and arms-sideward — raise! Heels — raise! 
 
 Sink ! Arms and feet — change ! Heels — raise ! Sink ! etc. 
 
 5 Left foot-forward-place, and neck — firm ! Trunk-to right — twist ! 
 
 Backward — bend ! Raise ! Forward — twist ! Feet — change ! Trunk- 
 to left — twist ! Backward — bend ! Raise ! Forward — twist ! Foot — 
 replace ! Repeat several times. Position ! 
 
 6 Sit on desk — place ! Hips— firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! etc. 
 
 7 Turning-to left 90 degrees-in place — jump! Same to the right! 
 
 8 Marching: Touch step, with combinations. (See Rhythmical Steps, 
 
 page 23, Lesson 17, complete.) 
 
 9 Shoulder circling ! one ! two ! three ! 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 1 Attention ! Left-forward — fall out ! Feet — change ! one ! two ! Position ! 
 Right-face, two steps-to left, and left — face — march ! etc. Make up sev- 
 eral combinations. 
 
 2 Left foot-forward — place ! Arms-forward and upward — raise ! Right 
 
 knee-on floor — support ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! Bend ! 
 Raise ! Position ! 
 
 3 Arms-forward bend, and heels — raise ! Arms-sideward fling, and knees — 
 
 bend ! Arms-bend, and knees — stretch ! Repeat several times, etc. 
 
 4 Hips-firm, and left knee-upward — bend ! Forward — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Stretch ! Bend ! Feet — change ! one ! two ! etc. 
 
 5 Trunk-forward — bend ! Arms swimming movement— one ! two ! and 
 
 three! etc. (See Imaginary Plays, page 52. No. 14.) 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and neck — firm! Trunk-to left — twist! To left — 
 
 bend ! Raise ! Forward and to right — twist ! To right — bend ! etc. 
 
 7 From place-forward — jump! (See page 17. No. 13.) 
 
 8 Marching: Left (right) about — face and forward — March; and Right- 
 
 face and forwards-March! (See Class Room Tactics, page 19. Les- 
 sons 7 and 9.) 
 
 9 Arms-upward — bend ! With palms up-arms slowly-sideward — stretch ! 
 
 (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 1 Attention ! Arms-forward, and heels — raise ! Arms-raise, and knees — 
 
 bend ! Arms-forward — sink, and knees — stretch ! Arms, and heels — 
 sink! (Repeat in four counts.) 
 
 2 Left — face! Number ofif by twos! Right — face! No Twos-ready-to 
 
 support, and No. Ones-neck— firm. No. ones-trunk-backward — bend ! 
 (No. Twos support by grasping the elbows of No. Ones, see page 12, 
 No. 11.) Reverse, etc. 
 
 3 Arms-forward, backward, sideward, and downward — stretch ! 
 
100 
 
 4 Marching: To the left flank, Halt; and to the right flank, Halt ! (See 
 
 Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lesson 8.) 
 
 5 Neck — firm ! Left-forward — fall out ! Heels^ — raise ! Sink ! Raise ! 
 
 Sink ! Feet — change ! one ! two ! Heels — raise ! etc. 
 
 6 Arms-upward — stretch, and feet-sideward — place ! Trunk-backward — 
 
 bend ! Raise ! etc. 
 
 7 In place — jump ! etc. 
 
 8 Arms-sideward and upward— raise ! Sink! 
 
 Lesson VL 
 
 1 Attention! Right-face, and left-face, and two steps-forward, and two 
 steps-backward — march ! 
 Half right — face ! Left-outward — fall out ! Replace ! Left — face ! Right 
 -outward — fall out ! etc. 
 
 2 Arms-sideward — raise, and left foot-forward — place ! Trunk-backward — 
 
 bend ! Raise ! Arms and feet — change ! Trunk-backward — bend ! etc. 
 
 3 Hands on desk— place ! Legs-^backward — stretch ! Forward — stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Hands on desk — place ! Legs-forward — place ! (Hang down in the 
 
 arms.) Arms — bend! (The arms are bent in the elbow joints, and 
 the body thereby lifted up.) Arms — stretch ! Position ! 
 
 5 Sit on desk — place ! Arms-upward — stretch ! Trunk-forward — bend ! 
 
 Trunk — raise f etc. 
 
 6 Wood play: Chopping Wood. (See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 12.) 
 
 Golf Play. (See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 13.) 
 
 7 With one step-forward — jump! one! two — three! four! five! (See page 
 
 17, No. 15.) 
 
 8 Marching: Column to the left by one, March! (See Class Room Tactics, 
 
 page 20. Lesson 10. 
 
 9 Arms-half sideward — bend ! Arms-sideward — fling, and heels — raise ! (In- 
 
 hale.) Arms-bend, and heels — sink! (Exhale.) Etc. 
 
 Lesson VIL 
 
 1 Attention ! Foot placing forward, and sideward, with both arms raising 
 
 forward, and sideward-first left foot, then right foot, in four counts: 
 one! two! three! four! 
 Marching : Change from forward to backward, and from forward march, 
 to Left (right) about — Face! and Left (right) about — Face and for- 
 ward — March! (See Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lessons 6 and 7.) 
 
 2 Same as Exercise 2, Lesson V, Eighth Grade, but with raising and sink- 
 
 ing of heels 
 
 3 Left-forward — fall out ! Arms-forward, upward, and downward — 
 
 stretch ! Feet — change ! etc. 
 
 4 Neck — firm ! Left knee-upward — bend ! Backward — stretch ! Bend ! 
 
 Knees — change ! 1-2, etc. 
 
 5 Arms-half sideward — bend ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Arms-slowly up- 
 
 ward — stretch! Bend! Stretch ! etc. 
 
 6 Feet-sideward — place, and hips — firm! Trunk-forward—bend! Trunk- 
 
 circling — left! backward! right! forward! Reverse! Trunk — raise I 
 Position! 
 
 7 Marching: Change step, with combinations. (See Rhythmical Steps, 
 
 page 24, Lesson 21, complete.) 
 
 8 Arms-forward and upward, and heels — raise ! Sideward and downward, 
 
 and heels — sink ! 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 
 1 Attention! Marching: Cross balance step. (See Rhythmical Steps, page 
 
 23, Lesson 20, complete.) 
 
 2 Hips — firm ! Trunk-to left — twist ! Trunk-backward — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 To right-twist ! Backward — ^bend ! Raise ! etc. 
 
101 
 
 3 Heels— raise ! Knees-deep — bend ! Arms-forward, upward, and down- 
 
 ward — stretch ! etc. 
 
 4 Left knee-upward — bend ! Sideward — move ! Forward — move ! Knees — 
 
 change ! 1-2. Sideward — move ! etc. 
 
 5 Left-backward — fall out ! Feet — change ! 1-2, etc. 
 
 6 Arms-forward raise, and knees — bend! (Kneel down.) Trunk-back- 
 
 ward bend, and arms-upward — fling! Trunk-raise, and arms-for- 
 ward — sink I Position ! 
 
 7 Marching: Double touch step. ((See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Les- 
 
 son 18.) 
 
 8 Arms-forward — bend! Trunk-to left-twist, and arms-sideward — fling! 
 
 (Inhale.) Arms-bend, and trunk-forward — twist! (Exhale.) Same 
 to right. 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 1 Attention ! Half right — face ! Knees— bend ! Left foot-out\vard— place ! 
 
 (Feet should be flat on the floor. This is ''On guard" position.) 
 Foot — replace ! Knees — stretch ! Left — face ! Repeat to right ! etc. 
 
 2 Same as exercise 2, Lesson VII, Eighth Grade, but with feet-sideward — 
 
 place ! 
 
 3 Hands-on desk — place ! Legs-backward — raise ! Arms — bend ! Arms — 
 
 stretch ! Position ! 
 
 4 Arms and left leg-forward — raise ! Right knee— bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 Arms and feet — change ! 1-2. Left knee — bend ! Stretch ! Position ! 
 Half right — face ! Neck — firm ! Left-outward — fall out ! Left heel — 
 raise ! Sink ! Foot — replace ! Left — face ! Right-outward — fall out ! 
 Right heel — raise ! etc. 
 
 5 Arms-forward — bend ! Arms-sideward fling, and left-backward — fall 
 
 out ! Arms-bend and fling, and feet — change ! etc. 
 
 6 Sit on desk — place ! Neck — firm ! Trunk-backward — bend ! etc. 
 
 7 Twice-in place — jump! one! two! three-four! five-six! seven! eight! 
 
 8 Marching: Cross balance step. (See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Les- 
 
 son 20.) 
 
 9 Arms-forward — bend ! Foot placing-forward, and arm flinging-side- 
 
 ward, in series — one! two! etc. (Inhale on the flinging and exhale on 
 the bending.) 
 
 Lesson X. 
 
 1 Attention ! Marching : Left-face and forward — March ! and Right-face 
 
 and forward — March! (See Class Room Tactics, page 19, Lesson 9.) 
 
 2 Arms-forward and upward-raise, and trunk-to left — twist ! Arms-side- 
 
 ward and downward-sink, and trunk-forward — twist! (The same to 
 the right.) 
 
 3 Half-right — face ! Left-outward — fall out ! Arms-upward — stretch ! 
 
 Bend! Stretch! Position! Left — face! (Repeat to the right.) 
 
 4 Neck-firm, and left foot-forward — place! Heels — raise! Knees — bend! 
 
 Stretch ! Feet — change ! 1-2, etc. 
 
 5 Wood Play. (See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 12.) 
 Put the Shot. (See Imaginary Plays, page 52, No. 15.) 
 
 6 Feet-sideward-place, and hips — firm ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Trunk — 
 
 circling! (Left, backward, right, forward.) 
 
 7 Marching: Change Step, with combinations. (See Rhythmical Steps, 
 
 page 24, Lesson 21.) 
 
 8 Arms-forward-bend, and left-forward — fall out ! Arms-sideward — 
 
 fling! (Inhale.) Bend! (Exhale.) Feet — change! 1-2, etc. 
 
 Lesson XL 
 
 1 Attention ! Neck — firm ! Heels — raise ! Knees-slowly-deep — bend I 
 
 Stretch ! Sink ! Position ! 
 
 2 Feet-sideward-place, and arms-upward — bend ! Trunk-backward — bend ! 
 
 Arms-sideward — stretch ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Raise ! etc. 
 
102 
 
 3 Arms-forward-fling! Sideward— fling ! Upward — stretch! Neck — firm! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4 Arms-sideward, and left leg-forward — raise ! Left foot — bend ! Stretch ! 
 
 etc. 
 
 5 Arms-forward and upward-fling, and left-backward — fall out ! Arms and 
 
 feet — change ! etc. 
 
 6 Neck-firm, and left foot-forward — place ! Trunk-to left — bend ! Raise ! 
 
 Feet — change ! 1-2 etc. 
 
 7 With one step-forward — jump! etc. 
 
 8 Marching: Double Touch and Polka Step. (See Rhythmical Steps, page 
 
 23, Lesson 19.) 
 
 9 Arms-sideward — raise! Trunk-to left — twist! Arms — circling! etc. 
 
 Lesson XIL 
 
 1 Attention ! Half-right — face ! Hips-firm, and left-guard position — place ! 
 
 (Place left foot outward and bend the knees at the same time.) Posi- 
 tion ! Left — face ! etc. 
 
 2 Arms-forward and upward-raise, and trunk-backward — bend ! Sideward 
 
 and downward-sink, and trunk — raise ! 
 ^ Hands-on desks — place ! Legs-backward — raise ! Arms — bend ! Arms — 
 stretch! (The arms must not be bent further than to a right angle in 
 the elbow joint; chest well forward; shoulders back; head up.) Posi- 
 tion ! 
 
 4 Arms-forward and upward — fling, and left leg-backward — raise! Right 
 
 knee — bend ! Right knee — stretch ! Arms and legs — change ! 1-2. 
 Left knee — bend ! Stretch ! Position ! 
 
 5 Arm.s-half sideward — bend ! Trunk-forward — bend ! Arm^rotation ! etc. 
 
 6 Sit on desk — place ! Arms-upward — bend ! Trunk-to left — twist ! Arms- 
 
 upward — stretch ! Bend ! Stretch ! Bend ! Trunk-to right — twist ! etc 
 
 7 Twice in place — jump! etc. 
 
 8 Marching: Change from forward to backward, march; and from for- 
 
 ward march, to Left (right) about — Face! (See Class Room Tactics, 
 page 19, Lesson 6.) 
 
 9 Hips — firm ! Shoulders-backward — move ! Forward — move ! 
 
 Lesson XHL 
 
 1 Attention ! Left foot-forward-place, and arms-upward — bend ! Heels — 
 
 raise ! Arms-upward-stretch, and knees — bend ! Arms-bend, and 
 knees — stretch ! etc. 
 
 2 Same as Exercise 2, Lesson IX, Eighth Grade. 
 
 3 Golf Play. (See Im.aginary Plays, page 52, No. 13.) 
 
 4 Left toe-backward — place ! Right knee — bend ! Stretch ! Feet — change ! 
 
 1-2, etc. 
 
 5 Half-right — face ! Left arm-upward, and right arm-backward-stretch, 
 
 and left-outward — fall out ! etc. 
 
 6 Sit on desk- — place! Trunk-backward — bend; etc. 
 .7 With arm flinging-forward — jump! etc. 
 
 8 Marching : Review all marching lessons. 
 
 9 Arms-forward and upward-raise, and trunk-to left — twist! (Inhale.) 
 
 Arms-sideward and downward-sink, and trunk-forward — twist ! (Ex- 
 hale.) Etc. 
 
 Lessons XIV and XV. 
 
 For the Girls: See Graded List of Folk Dances, page 26. 
 For the Boys: The events of the Class and Individual Competitions of the 
 Pubhc School's Athletic League. (See page 123.) 
 
103 
 
 COURSE OF PHYSICAL TRAINING. 
 
 For High School Girls, 
 
 Girls are required to have gymnasium suits including bloomers, " middy 
 blouse," and sneakers or heelless shoes. 
 
 Fourteen minutes are given the girls to change their uniform — 7 minutes at 
 the beginning and at the end of each lesson. 
 
 The period of gymnastic lesson of 30 minutes shall be divided into three 
 periods. The first period of 15 minutes shall include marching tactics and 
 calisthenics with or vv^ithout apparatus. The second period of 8 minutes shall 
 be devoted to exercises on the apparatus, generally on an apparatus for hanging 
 or supporting exercises, alternating v^^ith some track and field work for the 
 gymnasium. The remaining time for the third and last period shall be devoted 
 to gymnastic games, fancy steps and dancing. 
 
 The instructor should grade the tactics according to the ability of her class. 
 ' Apparatus .work is left to the discretion of the special instructor. Care 
 should be taken not to make this work too far advanced. Work for form. 
 The instructor should always stand ready to assist her pupils. 
 
 Each lesson must be practiced for two weeks. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 1(a) Marching tactics. Follow 
 
 Schrader's " The Teaching of 
 Tactics " beginning on page 8 
 — Rules and Methods of 
 Teaching, 
 (b) Cahsthenics — Free Arm. 
 
 2 Track and Field Work. 
 
 3 Fancy Steps and Aesthetic 
 Exercise, beginning with 
 ordinary stepping and position 
 of the hands or arms and feet. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 1(a) Tactics, 
 (b) Swedish Day's Order. 
 
 2 Apparatus. 
 
 3 Game. See list of games and 
 take in order as given. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 1(a) Tactics, 
 (b) Wands. 
 
 2 Track and Field Work. 
 
 3 Fancy Steps and Aesthetic Ex- 
 ercise, starting a simple dance, 
 Autumn Leaves, taking such 
 parts as are advisable for be- 
 ginning pupils. 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 1(a) Tactics, 
 (b) Wands. 
 
 2 Apparatus. 
 
 3 Games. 
 
 1(a) Tactics, 
 (b) Indian Clubs. 
 
 2 Track and Field Work. 
 
 3 Fancy Steps, Aesthetic Ex- 
 
 ercise and Autumn Leaves. 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 
 1(a) Tactics, 
 
 (b) Indian Clubs. 
 
 2 Apparatus. 
 
 3 Games. 
 
 Lesson VII. 
 
 1(a) Tactics, 
 (b) Dumb Bells. 
 
 2 Track and Field Work. 
 
 3 Continue with Aesthetic Ex- 
 
 ercises and review Autumn 
 Leaves. 
 Take Peter Pan Schottische. 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 
 1(a) Tactics, 
 (b) Dumb Bells. 
 
 2 Apparatus, 
 
 3 Games, 
 
 Lesson IX, 
 
 1(a) Tactics, 
 
 (b) Swedish "Day's Order. 
 
 2 Track and Field Work. 
 
 3 Teach a new dance ; take 
 
 from list of dances follow- 
 ing. 
 
104 
 
 Lesson X. 
 
 
 
 Lesson XVII. 
 
 1(a) Tactics. 
 
 
 1(a) 
 
 Tactics. 
 
 (b) Free Arm Exercises, 
 
 (b) 
 
 Free Arm. 
 
 2 Apparatus. 
 
 
 2 
 
 Track and Field Work. 
 
 3 Games. 
 
 
 3 
 
 Dancing. 
 
 Lesson XVIII. 
 
 Lesson XL 
 
 
 1(a) 
 
 Tactics. 
 
 1(a) Tactics. 
 
 
 (b) 
 
 Free Arm. 
 
 (b) Wands. 
 
 
 2 
 
 Track and Field Work. 
 
 2 Track and Field 
 
 Work. 
 
 3 
 
 Dancing. 
 
 3 Dancing. 
 
 
 
 Lesson XIX. 
 
 Lesson XIL 
 
 
 1(a) 
 (b) 
 
 Tactics. 
 Wands. ■ 
 
 1(a) Tactics. 
 
 
 2 
 
 Track and Field Work. 
 
 (b) Wands. ' 
 
 
 3 
 
 Dancing. 
 
 2 Apparatus. 
 
 3 Games. 
 
 
 
 Lesson XX. 
 
 
 
 1(a) 
 
 Tactics. 
 
 Lesson XIII. 
 
 
 (b) 
 2 
 
 Wands. 
 
 Track and Field Work. 
 
 1(a) Tactics. 
 
 
 3 
 
 Dancing. 
 
 (b) Indian Clubs. 
 
 
 
 
 2 Track and Field 
 
 Work. 
 
 
 Lesson XXI. 
 
 3 Dancing. 
 
 
 1(a) 
 
 Tactics. 
 
 
 
 (b) 
 
 Indian Clubs. 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 , Track and Field Work. 
 Dancing. 
 
 1(a) Tactics. 
 
 
 
 
 (b) Indian Clubs. 
 
 
 
 Lesson XXII. 
 
 2 Apparatus. 
 
 
 1(a) 
 
 Tactics. 
 
 3 Games. 
 
 
 (b) 
 
 Indian Clubs. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Track and Field Work. 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 
 
 3 
 
 Dancing. 
 
 1(a) Tactics. 
 
 
 
 Lesson XXIII. 
 
 (b) Dumb Bells. 
 
 
 1(a) 
 
 Tactics. 
 
 2 Track and Field 
 
 Work. 
 
 (b) 
 
 Dumb Bells. 
 
 3 Dancing. 
 
 
 2 
 
 Track and Field Work. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Dancing. 
 
 Lesson XVI. 
 
 
 
 Lesson XXIV. 
 
 1(a) Tactics. 
 
 
 1(a) 
 
 Tactics. 
 
 (b) Dumb Bells. 
 
 
 (b) 
 
 Dumb Bells. 
 
 2 Apparatus. 
 
 
 2 
 
 Track and Field Work. 
 
 3 Games. 
 
 
 3 
 
 Dancing. 
 
 Mass Free Exercises for Girls of High School. 
 
 Part I. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 1- 4 Mark time four counts, raising arms forward overhead the first count 
 
 5- 8 March forward four counts, lower arms sideward on the fifth count. 
 
 9-12 Mark time four counts, raising arms overhead on the ninth count. 
 
 13-16 March backward four counts, lowering arms on the thirteenth count. ■ 
 
 1-16 Repeat. 
 
105 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 1- 4 Stride forward left and raise arms forward upward. 
 
 5- 8 Bend left knee and circle arms inward to upward, circle position (full 
 circle). 
 
 9-12 Straighten left knee and circle arms inward to overhead position. 
 13-16 Return. 
 
 1-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 1- 4 Stride sideward left and raise arms sideward. 
 
 5- 8 Bend left knee and circle arms downward to side position. 
 
 9-12 Straighten left knee and circle arms down to sideward position. 
 
 13-16 Return. 
 
 1-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 1- 4 Stride backward left and raise arms forward overhead. 
 
 5- 8 Bend left knee and circle arms outward to upward circle position. 
 
 9-12 Straighten left knee and circle arms outward to overhead position. 
 
 13-16 Return. 
 
 1-16 Repeat right. 
 
 1-16 Pause. 
 
 Part II. 
 Exercise 1. 
 1- 4 March sideward left two steps, four counts, raise arms sideward on the 
 
 first count. 
 5- 8 Left about face while marking time, arms raised overhead on the fifth 
 
 count. 
 9-12 March sideward left two steps four counts, arms lowered in sideward 
 position. 
 13-16 Left about face while marking time, arms down on count thirteen. 
 1-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 1- 2 Hips firm. Stride backward left. 
 
 3- 4 Bend trunk forward, arms sideward. 
 
 5- 6 Straighten trunk, hands on hips. 
 
 7- 8 Return to starting position. 
 
 9-16 Repeat right. 
 
 1-16 Repeat all of Exercise 2. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 1- 2 Hips firm and stride left sideward. 
 
 3- 4 Bend trunk backward, arms upward. 
 
 5- 6 Straighten trunk, hips firm. 
 
 7- 8 Return to start. 
 
 9-16 Repeat to right. 
 
 1-16 Repeat all of Exercise 3. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 1- 2 Hips firm' and stride left forward. 
 
 3- 4 Bend trunk sideward left, arms sideward. 
 • 5- 6 Straighten trunk, hips firm. 
 
 7- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Repeat to right. 
 
 1-16 Repeat Exercise 4. 
 Repeat Part II. 
 
 1-16 Pause. 
 
106 
 
 Part III. 
 Exercise 1. 
 1-32 Repeat " March " of Exercise I of Part I. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 1- 4 Touchstep forward left and raise arms forward overhead. 
 
 5- 8 Lunge forward left and circle arms inward to upward circle position. 
 
 9-12 Touchstep forward left circle arms inward to upward position. 
 13-16 Return. 
 
 1-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 1- 4 Touchstep sideward left, raise arms sideward. 
 
 5- 8 Lunge sideward left and circle arms downward to sideward position. 
 
 9-12 Touchstep sideward left and circle arm downward to sideward position. 
 
 13-16 Return. 
 
 1-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 1- 4 Touchstep backward left and raise arms forward overhead. 
 5- 8 Lunge backward left and circle arms outward to upward position. 
 9-12 Touchstep backward left and circle arms outward to upward position. 
 13-16 Return. 
 1-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Music 4-4 time. 
 
 " Lincoln Centennial " — E. T. Paul, publishers, New York city. 
 
 Introduction — 24 counts. 
 
 Wand Exercises for the Girls of High School. 
 
 Part I. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 1- 2 Raise arms forward upward. 
 
 3- 4 Lunge left sideward, the lower right arm downward and bend left, wand 
 
 obliquely behind the back. 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 1- 2 Raise arms left. (Parallel.) 
 
 3- 4 Bend trunk left and }i circle of arms left, right arm upward and left arm 
 bent, wand vertically at right shoulder, 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 1- 2 Raise arms forward upward. 
 
 3- 4 Lunge left forward, lower arms backward, wand behind head on 
 shoulders. 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 1- 2 Raise arms left. (Parallel.) 
 
 3- 4 Twist trunk right and swing arms right. 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-10 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
107 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 1- 4 Two polka hops forward beginning left and ending with 14 turn left. 
 5- 8 Bend Arms (wand on chest), straighten arms and return. 
 9-32 Repeat three times in form of a square. 
 1-16 Pause of 16 counts between each part. 
 
 Part II. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 1- 2 Step obliquely forward outward left and bend arms, wand on chest. 
 
 3- 4 Bend trunk backward and straighten arms upward. 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Same right. ■ 
 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 1- 2 Side step left and raise left arm sideward and right arm upward. 
 
 3- 4 Twist trunk left and swing right arm downward. 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 1- 2 Lunge left forward and raise arms forward upward. 
 
 3- 4 Lower trunk forward and bend arms, wand on chest. 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 1- 2 Lunge left sideward and raise arms forward upward. 
 
 3- 4 Lower trunk and left arm forward and place right hand under left 
 shoulder. 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 1-32 Same as Exercise 5, Part I, but start right. 
 1-16 Pause of 16 counts between each part. 
 
 Part III. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 1- 2 Touch toe left forward, raise arms forward. 
 
 3- 4 Lunge left backward, wand in rear of shoulders. 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 1- 2 Touch toe left sideward, raise wand vertically left upward, right hand 
 
 at left shoulder. 
 3- 4 Cross steps left in rear bending right knee, reverse the above wand 
 
 position by swinging wand downward with % turn of body to left. 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 1- 2 Touch toe left backward, raise arms forward upward. 
 3- 4 Touch toe left sideward, raise wand vertically left upward, right hand 
 at the right shoulder. 
 
103 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. , 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 1- 2 Lunge left backward, raise left arm forward, right arm on left shoulder. 
 
 3- 4 Change knee bending with ^ turn left, wand vertical in front of body, 
 left hand on top. 
 
 5-8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Same right. 
 17-32 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 l-* 4 Two polka hops forward, every other line beginning left and right, and 
 
 ending with ^ turn left or right. 
 5- 8 Bend arms (wands on chest), straighten arms and return. 
 9-32 Repeat three times in form of a square. 
 1-16 Mark time in place. 
 
 Dumb-Bell Exercises for the Girls of High School. 
 
 Part I. 
 Exercise 1, 
 
 Mark time 16 counts and with ^ turn left on counts 1, 5, 9, 13. 
 Exercise 2. 
 1- 2 Raise bells sideward. 
 3- 4 Raise bells overhead and heels raise. 
 5- 8 Return. ' 
 9-16 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 1- 2 Raise bells sideward, upward. 
 3- 4 Lower bells sideward and bend knees. 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Repeat. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 1- 2 Raise bells sideward upward. 
 3- 4 Twist trunk left and remain in position. 
 5- 6 Twist front. 
 7- 8 Bells sideward, downward. 
 9-16 Repeat, twisting trunk to right. 
 Repeat the entire Part L 
 
 Part 11. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Mark time 4 times or counts, march forward 4 counts, mark time 4 
 counts, march backward, 4 counts. Two counts for each movement 
 following. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 1- 2 Bells on shoulders and touch step forward left. 
 
 3- 4 Lunge forward left and straighten arms diagonal (left obliquely for- 
 ward upward and right arm obliquely backward downward). 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Repeat, but touchstep and lunge right. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 1- 2 Bells on shoulders and touchstep sideward. 
 
 3- 4 Lunge sideward left and straighten arms diagonally, left sideward up- 
 ward, right sideward downward. 
 
109 
 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 1- 2 Bells on shoulders and lunge sideward left. 
 3- 4 Bend trunk sideward left, left bell touching ground, right bell straight 
 
 upward. 
 5- 8 Return. 
 
 9-16 Repeat sideward right. 
 Repeat entire Part 11. 
 
 Part III. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 One-fourth turn left and march sideward left 4 counts, continued in 
 16 counts, thus completing a full square. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 1- 2 Step left forward, raise bells forward. 
 
 3- 4 Kneel on right knee, raise bells obliquely, sideward, upward. 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 1- 2 Step left sideward, raise bells sideward over shoulder. 
 3- 4 Follow with right foot, bend knees, bells sideward, 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Right same. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 1- 2 Step left backward, raise bells forward, upward. 
 3- 4 One-half turn left, kneel on right knee, swing bells downward and 
 
 backward. 
 5- 8 Return. 
 9-16 Repeat right. 
 
 Repeat the entire Part III. 
 
 Track and Field Work. 
 
 The Track and Field Work for the girls in the gymnasium has been 
 divided into two terms to fit the school year of two semesters. 
 
 This indoor work of the first term is preparatory to the outdoor work com- 
 mon and in season in the spring and developing naturally into it. However, 
 take outdoor work whenever practical. 
 
 It is best to have the class or classes so divided that the girls are as nearly 
 the same age as possible. Their ability is more nearly the same and the work 
 can be made more interesting for them. ^ It is also more attractive for girls to 
 work with those of their own age, especially to the older pupils. The younger 
 ones are better off when among themselves. They are sometimes afraid of the 
 older, and when not afraid are apt to over-exert themselves by trying work of 
 the older, better prepared and more experienced pupils. 
 
 Always Name the Exercise or Event. 
 
 Take this work out of doors whenever possible. 
 
 First Term Classes. 
 
 A short run as an introduction to this period. The first lesson in correct 
 stepping might properly be given here. 
 
 The Standing Broad Jump. This may be practiced without any prepara- 
 tion. The pupils jump over chalk marks on the floor on command. In case 
 they are asked to jump over sticks placed on the floor care should be taken to 
 have the pupils stand close to the apparatus so there is no chance of landing 
 upon them and falling. 
 
110 
 
 Running and stepping from a spring-board onto a broad-based box 12 to 16 
 inches high and then from this to the mat. The box should be placed a foot or 
 two from the board and the mat the same distance from the box. This is a good 
 method to teach the pupils to step or jump upward without breaking their step, 
 and so leads to the high jump. 
 
 Running High Jump, with spring-board. The rope should be placed very 
 low. Pupils usually have more trouble with the high than all other forms of 
 jumping. Show them how to take off, how to use their arms; raise their knees, 
 and HOW to land. 
 
 Deep Jumping or Far Deep from benches or boxes : Teach carefully how to 
 stand with toes slightly over the edge so as not to slip back when jumping. 
 Caution them again about landing and be careful not to overdo in the matter 
 of depth. 
 
 Throwing the Bean Bag or Indoor Base Ball, with one or both hands, 
 by swinging. Throw for distance or, if the space is limited, throw at a mark 
 or into a box. 
 
 Races Over Short Distances. Arrange to run fro/n a mark to the wall. 
 If this distance is too short, touch the wall and run back again. If no free wall 
 is to be had let pupils run toward apparatus so placed that they run around the 
 same and back. The uprights for the horizontal bars, benches and horse are 
 preferable for this purpose, as the runners can get a hold of tJie same and help 
 themselves around. If this cannot be arranged place jumping stands, boxes or 
 even clubs on the floor around which they must run. The last arrangement 
 makes the run more difficult, for the pupils must slow up to run around and then 
 get a new start. 
 
 There is a little more danger, however, when the finish is at a wall. This 
 can be avoided by having a chalk mark some distance from the wall for the~ 
 finish ; this will permit |rapils to slow up before reaching the wall. New pupils 
 usually are timid and will not run at a wall at full speed, they slow up before 
 getting there, some almost stopping. By the time they feel safe enough -to run 
 fast they will have learned to manage themselves without incurring danger. If 
 the distance from wall to wall is very short have the races in a circle or an 
 oval. Place benches, horses or jumping stands in a -square or oblong and let 
 pupils run around them. Starting one at each corner, all will run in the same 
 direction. 
 
 Make use of the spring-board and mats in all of the jumping of this term, 
 excepting in the standing broad jump. The mats must be placed far enough 
 from any wall so that the pupils run no chance ' of hurting themselves should 
 they fall after jumping. When the mat slides, as it often does, have the last 
 two members of the line hold it until the first two members of the line have had 
 their turn, then they change, and these others take up their places in line again 
 for their turn. 
 
 Important. 
 
 All of the work in this term should be preparatory, and much time must be 
 spent in teaching how (method) so that pupils will be able to do future work 
 properly. 
 
 Above all, over-exertion must be avoided. Records cannot and should not 
 be made here, and the pupils should not be taught to think of them. Teach the 
 proper method and the records will come at the proper time. 
 
 Second Term Classes. 
 
 The work of the girls of this term differ but little from that of the first; 
 practically the same work is completed. If they have been properly started in 
 the first class they will now be able to make a little more effort, run a little 
 longer, jump farther, higher and deeper, and throw a little farther. 
 
 It is wise now to begin to make marks oh the floor for the broad jumping, 
 so the pupils can see how far they jump. You will Und that all classes get 
 better results in jumping if^ the mats are placed quite near at the beginning and 
 gradually moved away; stick to this plan for the indoor work. 
 
Ill 
 
 The plan of having the mats so placed that each pupil can jump as far as 
 he wishes does not work nearly as well; the better pupils jump no farther and 
 the weaker ones not as far, neither does the occasional lazy one. 
 
 A Short Run which comes in all classes (larger time being given in this 
 term) should never be forgotten. 
 
 The standing broad jump should be practiced as indicated in the first term; 
 also after a lesson with wands, using wands for sticks to jump across. 
 
 Running and stepping from the spring-board onto a box and from this to 
 the mat is repeated; then begin jumping over the box as a preliminary to 
 the broad high jump. Keep the distances small until the pupils feel safe, and be 
 careful to keep the box closer to the board than to the mat. If pupils then make 
 a short jump they will not strike the box, even though they miss that mat. 
 When they have had this jump several times, the placing of a girl flat across the 
 box adds, considerable to the excitement and pleasure. To keep pupils from 
 purposely touching the one on the box make it a rule to have the one that so 
 touches change places with the one on the box. 
 
 The Running High Jump is practiced with a spring-board and is still only 
 moderately high. 
 
 Climbing on Poles. The object should be quick climbing, not distance. 
 The pupils may begin to climb a bit on the ropes also, climbing up and down, 
 no sliding down. 
 
 Deep Jump and Deep Far Jump. Call attention each time to the position 
 on the board and watch carefully the depth. Pupils will go too far if permitted 
 to do so. 
 
 Throwing the bean bag as in the first term classes. A little heavier bag 
 may be used, or a farther throw attempted. 
 
 Races Over Short Distances. If properly managed the pupils get a lot of 
 pleasure out of these races. Relay races, etc. 
 
 Chinning with Undergrip. Use a bar or a ladder that is within reach by 
 standing on the toes. This exercise must be practiced carefully so as to avoid 
 over-exertion. 
 
 Horse: Apparatus Work. 
 
 1 Side-leaning rest grasping pommels. 
 
 2 Right knee flexed on horse, left leg extended backward. (Right knee 
 
 rest.) Left knee flexed on horse, right leg extended backward. (Left 
 knee rest.) 
 
 3 Both knees up. (Squat rest.) 
 
 4 Squat rest; Jump to a stand; clap hands and jump off. 
 
 5 (a) Grasp pommels, swing to cross seat right. Same left ; lean forward 
 
 swing left leg backward and dismount, 
 (b) Same, placing hands at rear and swinging left leg forward and dis- 
 mount. 
 
 6 Hands on right end of horse, come to a side-leaning rest. 
 
 7 Front vault making left and right quarter turns in landing. 
 
 8 Side vault making left and right quarter turns in landing. 
 
 9 Hands on right end of horse and vault over. Reverse. 
 
 10 Right hand on left pommel, left hand on side of horse and vault over. 
 Reverse. 
 
 Parallel Bars: 
 
 Side stand facing bars. 
 
 1 Front hang stand over grasp bar and jump forward, feet below bars. 
 Bend arms.. Position. 
 
 2 (a) Same, feet right sideward, (b) Same, feet left sideward, (c) Same, 
 
 backward. 
 
 3 Combine 1 and 2 (c). Combine 2 (a) and 2 (b). 
 
 4 Same 1, 2 and 3 with under grasp. Same combined grasp. 
 
 5 Cross stand position at end of bars. Grasp bars and come to a cross 
 
 rest position, head erect, back hollow, legs together and straight, toes 
 down. Resume 1st position. 
 
112 
 
 6 (a) Same, raising left leg forward and alternating right. Resume posi- 
 
 tion. 
 
 (b) Same, raising knees, alternating both, 
 
 (c) Same, alternating, raising' legs forward and backward and together. 
 
 7 Running and mount. 
 
 Mount into outer cross seat over right bar, left knee bent^ left arm on 
 opposite bar, right leg straight, right arm on same bar. Swing back 
 to position. 
 
 8 Same left. 
 
 9 Same as 7. Place both hands on right bar (thumbs back) legs straight 
 
 in front. Push off and dismount. Reverse. 
 10 Run grasp bars and swing over right bar. 
 Same left. 
 
 Buck ■' 
 
 All exercises beginning with a run. 
 
 1 Side-leaning rest. Position. 
 
 2 Right knee rest, left leg straight. Position. 
 
 3 Same left. 
 
 4 Squat rest, jump to a stand, clap hands and jump off. 
 
 5 1, 2, 3, 4, facing quarter turn left and right and half turn left and right 
 
 on the dismount. 
 
 6 Straddle vault both hands. 
 
 7 Straddle vault right hand. 
 
 8 Straddle vault left hand. 
 
 9 Same 6, 7, 8 with ^ and ^ turns in landing. 
 
 Raise buck gradually higher in each exercise after simple exercise is 
 accomplished. 
 
 Rings: 
 
 Without swinging, rings as high as shoulders. 
 
 1 Grasp rings allowing body to drop backward into front hang stand 
 
 (arms parallel) feet on floor. Chest well forward, head in line with 
 
 body. 
 
 Raise left and right leg straight forward, upward. 
 
 2 Same, bending alternate knees. 
 
 3 Same, bending and straightening arms. 
 
 4 Same left and right leg alternate backward raising from rear hang stand. 
 
 5 Same as 2 and 3. 
 
 6 Same describe ^4 circle to left passing forward and to right sideward. 
 
 Reverse. 
 
 7 Same complete circle. 
 
 8 Jump into ordinary grasp, rings just within reach of upward extended 
 
 arms. Swing legs forward and backward — short swing. Same side- 
 ways. Same circling. 
 
 9 Grasp rings, walk backward as f^r as possible, then run forward and 
 
 swing backward several times. Jump off with a run. Same, using 
 right and left foot on forward swing to give push off. 
 10 Same, but with forward swing face about. Turn back at finish of swing 
 so that you are facing same direction you are swinging. 
 This should not be attempted until foregoing exercises have been 
 successfully performed 
 
 Ropes: 
 
 1 Hang stand leg exercises, feet flat on floor, head erect, chest prominent. 
 
 Two ropes apiece. Position. 
 
 2 Raise right and left leg alternate forward, outward and sideways. 
 
 3 Raise right and left leg forward. Position. Bend knee. Position. 
 
 4 Combine' 3, right leg forward, bend knee, extend and position. 
 
 5 Same left. 
 
 6 Hang in climbing position. 
 
 7 Hang in climbing position and change position of legs. 
 
113 
 
 8 Same position. Change arms right and left alternate, extend sideward. 
 
 9 Same position. Extend leg, alternate left and right sideways. 
 Climbing position one pull up of arms and push up of feet. Jump 
 
 down. Same 2 pull ups of arms and feet. 
 10 Climb. 
 
 Balance Board: 
 
 As many pupils work as there are boards. All start at the same end, 
 with inner hands grasped shoulder high, the two outer pupils place their 
 outer hands on hip. Place right foot placed on board ready to begin, 
 so all will start stepping with their left foot. As soon as the first 
 group of pupils approach the center of the boards the next group 
 begin, etc. 
 
 1 Walk forward, common walk. 
 
 2 Walk forward, double quick. 
 
 3 Walk forward, on tip toes. 
 
 4 Walk forward, with raising knee forward in 2 counts. 
 
 5 Walk forward, with raising one foot in front of the other knee, in 2 
 
 counts. 
 
 6 Touch step forward. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 17 
 
 (complete). 
 
 7 Same as 6, but touch twice. Double touch step. 
 
 8 Change step forward. See Rhythmical Steps, page 22, Lesson 12 
 
 (complete). 
 
 9 Double touch and change step — touching foot in front and back and 
 
 then change step. 
 
 10 Polka step forward. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 15 
 
 (complete). 
 
 11 Cross balance step. See Rhythmical Steps, page 23, Lesson 20 
 
 (complete). 
 
 12 Run forward. 
 
 Circle Swing or Giaxt Stride. 
 
 Going Forward. 
 
 Take hold of rope, right hand up, left hand low, rope in front and 
 step away from center of apparatus as far as possible. 
 
 1 Walk forward in quick step, upon command turn about. 
 
 2 Walk forward in quick step on toes, upon command turn about. 
 
 3 Run forward, upon command turn about. 
 
 4 Run forward, upon command walk forward. 
 
 5 Skipping forward. 
 
 6 Skipping forward, upon command walk. 
 
 7 Skipping forward, upon command run. 
 
 8 Hopping forward on outer foot eight counts, walk forward eight counts. 
 
 Alternating. 
 
 9 Hopping forward eight counts, turn about and walk forward eight 
 
 counts. 
 
 10 Gallop forward on outer foot, upon command walk forward. 
 
 11 Run forward four counts or steps, and one giant stride. 
 
 12 Run forward eight counts and eight giant strides. 
 
 Take hold of rope, left hand up, right hand low, and repeat above 
 
 exercises. 
 Take hold of rope, inner hand high, the outer hand grasp rope from 
 
 behind. Repeat all the above exercises, except those that require a 
 
 turn about. 
 
 Team games suggested are: 
 
 Dodge Ball. 
 
 Double Dodge Ball. .; 
 
114, 
 
 Captain Dodge Ball. 
 
 Run Dodge Ball. 
 
 Base Dodge Ball. ■ 
 
 End Ball. 
 
 Corner Ball. . * ' 
 
 Captain Ball. 
 
 Relay Races. 
 
 See Games, page 50. 
 
 OUTLINE FOR THE ARTISTIC EXECUTION OF FANCY STEPS, 
 STEP COMBINATIONS AND SERIES. 
 
 I. Stepping Elements. 
 
 Ordinary stepping, the most elemental of the natural movements form used 
 in dancing, is executed forward, sideward and backward. 
 
 Forward: The passive leg is fully straightened forward, slightly turned 
 outward, and knee and ankle extended with toes pointing about ankle 
 high. In transferring the weight the toes first strike the floor. The other 
 leg becomes passive and repeats the movement. 
 
 Sideward: It is executed in three forms: with a closing-step, with a front- 
 cross-step, and with a rear-cross-step. The closing step is performed by 
 raising and straightening the leg, as described under Forward Marching, 
 but to the side instead of forward. When the weight has been transferred 
 the other leg is raised sideward similarly and is then closed to the other, 
 heel to heel. The front-cross-step begins in a like manner but instead of 
 the passive leg closing to the active one, it crosses in front of it with a 
 slightly flexed knee, the body weight being carried from one foot to the 
 other. The rear-cross-step differs from the preceding one only in as much 
 as the leg crosses behind instead of in front. 
 
 Backward: The first leg movement is the same as that of forward march- 
 ing. After the raising and straightening of the leg forward it is moved 
 backward and placed toes first upon the floor. 
 
 Derived Forms of Stepping. 
 
 1. The Follow-Step. Command : Step left forward — one ! Follow with 
 right — two ! On " one " the leading leg is removed as in stepping, and on " two " 
 the instep of the following foot is brought to the heel for the forward (or side- 
 ward) step. For the backward movement the heel oi the following foot is 
 brought to the instep. The modifications are the glide-follow-step, in which 
 the leading foot glides gently over the floor, and the draw-following-step, in 
 which the following foot is drawn over the floor as it closes heel to instep as 
 frequently used in simple Spanish dances. Other modifications may be made 
 by changing the tempo: raising the leg forward on "one," placing it on the floor 
 on " two," and following on " three," etc. 
 
 Note: Modifications may consist of: Foot and leg exercises: Sliding, draw- 
 ing, stamping, heel raising, knee bending, foot, knee and leg raising and 
 swinging. Head, trunk and arm exercises. Combinations of various 
 parts. The adding of turns. 
 
 2 The Closing-Step. Command : Step left forward — ^one ! Close with 
 right — two ! Similar to the f ollow-step except the closing foot closes heel to heel 
 instead of heel to instep. 
 
 3 The Touch-Step. Command : Left foot forward — place. The left foot 
 is raised about ankle high in the direction indicated, knee and ankle thoroughly 
 extended; the toes are hghtly placed upon the floor with the foot slightly turned 
 outward and again immediately raised, giving the exercises the characteristic 
 touching movement from which it derives its name. Modifications: See note 
 above. 
 
115 
 
 II. Springing Elements. 
 
 Under springing elements we will consider only: Leaping (Jete), and cut- 
 ting (Coupe), and hopping (Saute). 
 
 1. Leaping (Jete). Command: Leap left forward outward — leap! (or 
 one!) Four leaps forward beginning left-one, two, three, four. The leg is 
 extended in the direction indicated, similarly as in running and the body pro- 
 pelled with a bound from the other foot giving it momentary flight. Alighting 
 is performed upon the ball of the foot with slight flexing of the joints during 
 which the pendant or hanging foot is raised with toes pointing behind the ankle 
 of the active leg. 
 
 2. Cutting (Coupe). The exercise is termed front, side or rear cut, accord- 
 ing to the position from which the movement begins. Commands : 
 
 a. Side cut left-cut (or one). The straight left leg has been previously 
 raised sideward, toes pointing about ankle high, in preparation. On one the 
 left foot, through a slight spring from the right displaces the right which is 
 then immediately swung to the position sideward. 
 
 b. Front cut left and rear cut-one, two. It begins from the forward posi- 
 tion of the left leg and resembles the execution of the side cut, finishing, how- 
 ever, with the right leg backward ankle high. The rear cut right which follows 
 it (it may also be given separately) terminates with the left leg again in the 
 forward position for the front cut. The body alights as described in the side cut. 
 
 The execution progresses from ordinary march to polka, mazurka, galop 
 and schottische time, the number of cuts performed in a measure equalling the 
 number of beats in a measure, as, two cuts in 2-4 and 6-8, three in 3-4 time, etc. 
 Furthermore,, such tempo as 2-4 and 6-8 (polka and two-step) admit of two 
 small cuts being performed on one beat ; that is, four small cuts to a measure. 
 Arm and head movements may be added to the hopping, leaping and cutting. 
 3 Hopping (Saute) and skipping. These exercises are alike in the nature 
 of their execution, both consisting of an upward spring of the body supported 
 by one foot, differing, however, in the time rate of their performance. The 
 skipping step is done in ordinary march or polka time, the skipping movement 
 requiring but a slight part of the time consumed for a marching step, equalling 
 about the sixteenth note of a dotted eighth note. It is also adaptable to mazurka 
 time. Its execution resembles stepping from place, the skipping performed upon 
 the ball of the active foot while stepping from place with the other. Hopping 
 varies from skipping only in degree and time. 
 
 Dance-Step Sequences. 
 
 Step-sequences consist of combinations of the previously discussed step and 
 springing elements and also of the suggested modifications by means of the free 
 exercises. They have become very popular both in physical training and in 
 social dancing more so in the former, because they possess inherent combining 
 possibilities that give them special value for gymnastic purposes. The writer 
 is indebted to Mr. Emil Rath for some of the ideas contained in the division and 
 terminology of the dancing material and for the great number of terms used, 
 inasmuch as they are, with slight modifications, literal translations. 
 
 Dance-Step-Sequences — March and Polka Time. 
 
 1. Step and Touch-Step. 
 
 Sequence may be modified by : 
 
 1. (Sliding) with leading foot. 
 (Stamping) 
 
 2. Touching with heel. 
 
 3. Forward step and touch-step sideward. 
 
 4. Side-step and touch-step forward. 
 
 5 Side-step and touch-step sideward. 
 
 6 Backward step and touch-step sideward. 
 
 7 Backward step and touch-step forward. 
 
116 
 
 2. The Dip-Step. 
 
 (a) The Forward Dip-Step. Command : Step left forward one. 
 Bend left knee and raise right leg forward-two. The command 
 speaks for itself. 
 
 (b) The Cross-dip-Step. (Peasant Courtesy.) Command: Step left 
 sideward-one. Place right foot obliquely backward, inward and 
 bend knees-two. After the side-step with complete transfer of 
 weight on "one," the right foot is placed on its toes crosswise 
 behind the left so that with the bending the knee of the right leg, 
 will be directly above the heel of the left foot. The knees are not 
 quite bent half deep. It is executed in fast waltz time, two 
 measures for the step and later in polka and two-step time. 
 
 3. Closing or Follow-Step and Touch-Step forward and sideward. 
 
 This combination is executed in the direction signified, the closing 
 — or the follow-step on one and two and the touch-step on three. 
 Slow mazurka time. A double touch-step may also be used, or a 
 heel and toe touch-step in march time. 
 
 4. The closing-step on one and two with lowering of trunk forward or to 
 
 one side on " two " and raising it on three. Slow mazurka rhythm. 
 
 5. The Closing-Step with bending of knees. This is executed similar to 
 
 the previous step with knee-bending (half deep) substituted for the 
 trunk lowering. 
 
 6. The Balance Step. (Waltz balance step.) Command: Step left out- 
 
 ward — one! Follow right and raise heels — two! (Slow mazurka 
 
 or waltz time.) Lower heels — three! 
 
 Modifications : GH de-balance-step, obtained by gliding. Stamp- 
 balance step, obtained by stamping. Draw- 
 balance-step, obtained by sliding, or drawing the 
 following foot. 
 
 7. Cross Balance Step. Com'mand : Step left outward — one! Cross right 
 
 foot in front and raise heels — two ! Lower heels — three ! This may 
 be modified by gliding or stamping the leading foot. Slow mazurka 
 or waltz time, gradually progressing to the moderate and fast waltz 
 rhythm. 
 
 8. The Balance-Touch-Step. Command : Step left sideward — one ! Touch 
 
 (place) right foot forward and raise heels — two ! Lower heels — 
 three ! This is a variation of the' balance-step. The modifications 
 and rhythmical progressions are the same as those of the previous 
 step. 
 
 9. Change-step. Command : Step left forward — step ! Follow with right 
 
 ' — follow ! Step left forward — step ! 
 
 Sequence of Stepping with Turns. 
 
 1. Cross-step — Half-turn left. Command : Step left sideward — one ! Step 
 
 right across front — two ! Half-turn left on toes, closing heels — ^three 1 
 Mazurka time. 
 
 2. Cross-step turn. Command : Face left and step left forward — one ! 
 
 Front-cross-step right or step right across front — two ! Three-quarter 
 turn left — three ! thus completing a whole turn. The execution pro- 
 gresses from mazurka and slow time to polka and two-step time (one 
 cross-step turn to each measure). 
 
 3. Three-step turn. Command : Step sideward left — one ! Half turn left 
 
 on left foot and step sideward right — two ! Half turn left on right 
 foot and step sideward left — ^three ! This step requires a measure of 
 mazurka time which may change from slow to moderate rhythm. It 
 is, however, simplified when performed as the three-step turn with 
 closing. This takes four counts, closing the right to the left being 
 the last movement. 
 
117 
 
 Springing Sequences. 
 
 1. The Leap-hop. Command : Leap — one ! Hop — two ! The command 
 
 plainly describes this sequence. 
 
 2. The Cut-hop. Command: Front, rear, or side. Side-cut — one! Hop — 
 
 two ! This command also describes this step. The front cut-hop is 
 always followed by the rear cut-hops. 
 
 3. Cut-swing-hop. Command : Cut — one ! Hop and swing leg forward — 
 
 two ! This sequence always begins with a front cut-hop. The three 
 springing sequences just given require march and polka rh3'thm. 
 
 4. Three running steps and swing-hop. This is executed forward, on 
 
 diagonal lines and sideward with rear on front cross-step. Schottische, 
 polka, and march rhythm. 
 
 Sequence Consisting of Stepping and Springing Elements. 
 
 1. The Step-hop. Command : Step left forward — ^one ! Hop--two ! Dur- 
 
 ing the hop the free leg may swing forward or across in front and 
 the combination called " The step swing-hop," or the free leg raised 
 backward and this combination called " The Balance-hop," in which 
 case the command would be : Step left forward — one ! Hop, and raise 
 right leg backward — two ! The shoulders may turn a little toward 
 the raised leg and the trunk incline somewhat in the direction of the 
 step, but this should not be exaggerated. Polka, march and schot- 
 tische time. They may also be adapted to waltz and mazurka rhythms. 
 Modifications — stamping or gliding on the leading foot. 
 
 2. Schottische Step (glisse, coupe, jete, saute). This is a combination of 
 
 a step cut and a step swing-hop, as previously described, taking four 
 counts. Step left forward, on one ; displace the left foot forward, 
 on two.; step left forward again, on three, and hop on left, swing 
 right leg forward, on four. This step may be performed in any 
 direction. Schottische time. 
 
 3. The Polka-hop (saute, glisse, coupe, jete). It is closely related to the 
 
 change-step and requires but this addition of a hop on the stationary 
 foot while the stepping foot is moving in a signified direction to begin 
 the exercise. Hop on the right, on one, and take the change step 
 forward on two, three and four. Polka, march and galop rhythms. 
 
 4. The Step-cut and Hop. Command : Step-cut left sideward — one ! two ! 
 
 Hop — three ! Mazurka rhythm. A pleasing variation of this step is 
 gliding with the leading foot and this gives to. 
 
 5. The Mazurka-hop (glisse, coupe, saute). Here the displaced left leg 
 
 which was held in readiness in the side position for another step to 
 the left, must bend at the knee, bringing the foot, with toes pointing 
 to the ankle of the right leg during the hop on the right foot upon 
 the third count, in order to begin the next step with a glide. This 
 knee flexion with the hop step on the third count is characteristic 
 of the mazurka and must always occur. Mazurka rhythm. 
 
 6. The Waltz-Step. Command : Waltz-step forward — one ! two ! three ! 
 
 or leap-glide-cut (jete, glisse, coupe). On one, leap forward small 
 step left foot ; on two glide forward right, and displace the right 
 foot by a cut, on three. Mazurka to waltz time. 
 
 Stepping and Springing Sequences With Turns. 
 
 1, The Step-hop-turn. It consists of two step hops with a half turn on each 
 hop. The same foot begins the step as is indicated by the turn. The 
 same piodifications apply here as have been given under the step-hop 
 (gliding, stamping). 
 
118 
 
 2 The Polka-hop-turn, forward. It consists of two polka-hops in the 
 forward direction with a half turn right on the left polka-hop and 
 another half turn right on the right polka-hop, which should be taken 
 backward. 
 
 3. The Waltz-turn. This resembles the foregoing with the waltz-step tak- 
 ing place of the polka-hop and the turning being performed left with 
 the waltz-step left in the forward movement instead of right, as is 
 the case in the polka-hop-turn. 
 
 . 4. The Mazurka-hop -turn. Two mazurka-hops left sideward with a half 
 turn on each hop. 
 
 Alternations of Step-Sequences. ^ 
 
 Step-sequences may be alternated with each other in two ways, viz., in an 
 unlimited or limited manner. Unhmited alternations consist of changing from 
 one exercise to another upon command of the teacher and are frequently used 
 for the purpose of reviewing previously learned dance steps ; e. g., the class is 
 moving about the gymnasium in a long ffenk rank or in a column of front 
 couples and upon command of the teacher performs the change step. After a 
 number of repetitions the instructor commands, '' Step-hop." Awaiting the 
 proper moment he gives the command of execution, " Begin," whereupon the 
 class changes to the new exercise. 
 
 In the limited alternations the two steps intended for practice are named 
 and the number of repetitions of each definitely stated. To illustrate : Four 
 touch-steps forward (or a greater or lesser number of each if desired). This 
 will suffice if the class is thoroughly famihar with the steps that are to be taken 
 upon comm.and while it is moving around the gymnasium; if not, it is necessary 
 to halt the class and demonstrate. 
 
 Bilateral steps are best suited for alternations because they regularly lead to 
 right and left execution. 
 
 Unilateral steps may be used, however, if they are altered by the addition 
 of some element, thereby changing their rhythm and making them possible of 
 being done left and right. 
 
 A point to observe is that steps of the same musical rhythm are alternated 
 with each other. A few examples are given below : 
 
 Four step-hops (or variations), or swing-hop, or balance-hop, etc., alter- 
 nated with : 
 
 (a) Eight marching steps. 
 
 (b) Eight skipping steps. 
 
 (c) Four glides left and four right. 
 
 (d) Four polka-hops. 
 
 (e) Four change-steps, resting on count 4, etc. 
 
 Two change-steps, or balance-steps, or waltz-steps, etc., alternated with : 
 
 (a) Two leap-hops with and added hop. 
 
 (b) Two balance-hops with and added hop. 
 
 (c) Three galops left and three right 
 
 (d) Two three-step turns. 
 
 (e) Six marching or skipping steps, etc. 
 
 Two schottische-steps, or three running steps with swing-hop taken twice, 
 alternated with : 
 
 (a) Four leap-hops. 
 
 (b) Four cut-hops. 
 
 (c) Four ghde-hops. 
 
 (d) Four swing-hops. * 
 
 (e) Eight cuts forward and back. 
 
 (f) Two cross-dip steps, 4 counts to each step, etc. 
 
ii9 
 
 Two waltz-steps, or six running steps, alternated with: 
 
 (a) Two balance-hops. 
 
 (b) Two draw-closing steps to one side. 
 
 (c) Two swing-hops (variations). 
 
 (d) Two balance-steps, etc. 
 
 These examples of march, mazurka, schottische and waltz rhythm may be 
 varied in different days. Arm, head and trunk exercises may be added, which 
 arouses much interest. 
 
 STEP COMBINATIONS. 
 
 Step combinations consist of joining two or more of the described steps 
 in such a manner that their execution singly or an even number of times will 
 be adaptable to a musical phrase. They differ from alternations inasmuch as 
 each combination presents a composite whole which is performed generally left 
 and right alternately, though sometimes only to one side. This, however, does 
 not prevent the occurrence of sequences within a combination which are repeated 
 to the left and right and preceded or followed or both preceded and followed 
 by other steps, as is often the case in the longer combinations used in dances, 
 by which arrangement the various parts are unified or bound together into a 
 composite whole. According to the number of sequences used in this whole, 
 we ma}- leave two-, three- or four-part, etc., combinations, although care should 
 be taken not to burden the mind with too long an order of sequences. 
 
 In arranging combinations a number of points must necessarily be observed. 
 It will be found, for instance, that such combinations which may be executed 
 left and lead without interruption to the right are more practical for class work 
 than those which constantly repeat the same side and must be brought to a close 
 in order to begin their execution to the opposite side. 
 
 The inherent rhythm of a sequence is a factor determining its fitness in a 
 combination with . another step. It is quite evident that a step in Polka (2-4) 
 time cannot be joined with one in Mazurka (3-4) time. Such combinations are, 
 however, possible and frequently used if a pause be introduced into a step of 
 2-4 time, thereby giving it the time value of Mazurka rhj-thm. 
 
 Thus a step and touch-step followed by a pause may be used in a combina- 
 tion of 3-4 time. Generally, steps differ in the momentum they produce, some 
 possessing a tendency toward acceleration, others toward . retardation. This 
 should be observed where arranging combinations. It is of particular value in 
 the grading of steps. 
 
 Besides the inherent speed and rhythm of sequence direction also influences 
 selection for combinations. A bilateral step is impossible of execution twice to 
 the same side, for its completion always places the opposite foot in readiness for 
 the opposite side. If, therefore, a bilateral step be done to the left, it follows 
 that it, or some other step, must be performed to the right. This is. however, 
 not true of unilateral steps, for their performance to the left may be followed 
 by a repetition to the same side of the same or some other steo ; on the other 
 hand it cannot be taken left and right alternately. These obstacles in arranging 
 combinations may be overcome by the use of a catch or intermediate step. 
 
 The catch or intermediate step consists of a rapidly executed closing step 
 or leap occurring on the last part of the last count of the step. By the use 
 of the catch step two bilateral steps may be joined so that they can be per- 
 formed to the same side as follows : e. g., Rocking-step to the left, catch-step 
 and repeat the rocking-step to the left, the combination requiring six counts ; 
 balance-hop to the left or forward, catch-step and balance-hop repeated, requir- 
 ing four counts. The catch-step takes place on the last part of the third count 
 in the first, and on the last part of the second count in the second comb-nat'on. 
 A unilateral step is made possible of a left and right execution ?is follows : 
 Cross-step-turn to the left, a catch-step and a cross-step-turn to the right. If 
 the cross-step-turn is taken in mazurka (3-4) time the exercise will require six 
 counts and the catch-step occurs on the last part of the third count, /. c, upon 
 completion of the first cross-step-turns. It cannot be used to connect steps that 
 begin with a leap or hop. \ 
 
120 
 
 The unilateral step is most frequently employed in combination and leads 
 pleasingly without disturbing the rhythmic fluency to a bilateral step which in 
 turn leads to the opposite side. 
 
 There is another method of joining steps quite' worthy of consideration. 
 It consists of fusing steps into each other as it were, and its best movement of 
 a first step is utilized as the first movement of a second step, i. e., the second 
 step begins before the first is completed, e. g., in linking the change-step and 
 the rocking-step the last movement of the former, i. e., the forward step, con- 
 stitutes the first movement of the latter, producing a combination of four counts. 
 
 These combinations always require less counts than the total of the two 
 (or more steps) joined would indicate. This mode presents some pretty com- 
 binations but by overdoing produces unesthetic exercises and may bring an 
 unemphasized movement on an emphasized part of a measure or vice versa. 
 
 Besides the original difficulty of the selected step the number of measures 
 required for a combination also determines its difficulty. Care should therefore 
 be exercised in their arrangement, so that there is a gradual progression of 
 the number of parts executed in a given number of measures. 
 
 A few examples of combinations are given below: 
 
 Two Part Combinations. 
 Four measures of polka time. 
 
 1. Three polka-steps with a cross-step-turn. 
 
 2. Change-step or two-step in place of polka-steps. 
 
 3. Balance-hops and a step-cut. 
 
 4. Three leap-hops and a cross-step-turn. 
 
 5. Two step-hops and a step-hop and rocking-step linked. 
 
 Four measures of mazurka time. 
 
 1. One mazurka-hop and three draw-rocking-steps. 
 
 2. Three mazurka-hops and a three-step-turn (or three stamps). 
 
 3. Three mazurka-hops and a balance- (or balance touch) step. 
 
 4. Three balance-hops with cuts and three leaps. 
 
 5. 'Two rocking-steps, a three-step-turn, and intermediate step and a rock- 
 
 ing-step. 
 
 Two measures of schottische time. 
 
 1. One schottische-step and a slow cross-step-turn. 
 
 2. Three running steps with swing-hop and two swing-hops. 
 
 3. Three leap-hops and two leaps. 
 
 4. One schottische-step and two cut-hops. 
 
 5. Two cuts with swing-hops and three running steps with swing-hops. 
 
 Two measures of waltz time. 
 
 1. A waltz-step and a balance-hop (only to one side). 
 
 2. Three running steps and a draw-closing-step. 
 
 3. A swing-hop and a balance-step. 
 
 4. A swing-hop and a cross-step-turn linked. 
 
 Two measures of polka to galop time. 
 
 1. A change-step and a draw-rocking-step linked. 
 
 2. A glide-balance-step and a follow-step. 
 
 3. A polka-hop and a cross-step-turn. 
 
 4. A ^roSs-step-turn and a rocking-leap. 
 
 5. Two glides (finished) and a glide-hop. 
 
 Two measures of mazurka time. 
 1. A mazurka-hop and three glides. 
 
 7 
 
 A mazurka-hop and a balance-step. 
 
121 
 
 3. A step, cut and hop and step hop, hopping twice. 
 
 4.' A cross-step-turn and draw-rocking-step. 
 
 5. A waltz-step-turn and a balance-hop (only to one side). 
 
 Three and Four Part Combinations. 
 
 Four measures of polka to galop time. 
 
 1. Two polka-hops, a cross-dip-step and a cross-step-turn. 
 
 2. Two change-steps, a balance-hop and a cross-step-turn. 
 
 3. Two swing-hops, step and touch and a step-cut. 
 
 4. Two leap-hops, a cross-step-turn and a polka-hop. 
 
 Four measures of schottische time. 
 
 1. Two schottische steps, a three-step-turn with swing hop, and a slow 
 
 cross-step-turn (one measure). 
 
 2. Three running steps forward with swing-hop taken twice, two swing- 
 
 hops in place, and four running steps backward. 
 
 3. Two running steps and a balance, hop taken twice, and four cut hops. 
 
 4. Two cut-swing-hops, four running steps, two swing-hops and three run- 
 
 ning steps with swing-hop. 
 
 Four measures of waltz time. 
 
 1. Two waltz-steps, a glide-hop, and a draw-closing-step. 
 
 2. Two balance-steps, a balance-hop, and a draw-closing-step. 
 
 3. A slow cross-step-turn (2 measures), a draw-closing-step and a step-hop. 
 
 4. A glide-balance-hop, three running steps, a glide cut and a glide bal- 
 
 ance hop. 
 
 These examples of step combinations as well as the exercises given under 
 alternations of step-sequences may be varied by performing them in different 
 directions; by changing the number of repetitions (alternations); by executing 
 them in various formations, as in long flank rank, in open order, or in a column 
 of front or flank couples, when they may start with the same, the outer, or 
 inner foot; by adding exercises of the head, arm and trunk; and by performing 
 them with tactic exercises. 
 
 When thus applied to the gymnastic lesson they arouse and maintain the 
 interest of all classes. 
 
 Shadows Schottische. 
 
 Music: Any Schottische. 
 
 Formation: In columns of front or flank couples. Both start with same 
 foot. 
 
 I. Begin with right foot. Point in fourth position in front, 1. Point 
 in second position, 2. Point in fifth position in rear and bend 
 the knees, 3. Replace, 4. 
 II. Repeat I, beginning with left foot. Point left in fourth position in 
 front, 1. Point in second position, 2. Point in fifth position in 
 rear and bend knees, 3. Replace, 4. 
 III. Step with right foot to side, 1. Cross left foot in rear, 2. Right 
 foot to side, 3. Cross left foot in rear, 4. Right foot to side and 
 hold, 5 and 6. Point left in fourth position in front and hold, 
 7 and 8. 
 ,IV. Repeat III, beginning with left foot. Step with left foot to side, 1. 
 Cross right foot in rear, 2. Left foot to side. 3. Cross right foot 
 in rear, 4. Left foot to side and hold, 5 and 6. Point right foot 
 in the fourth position and hold, 7 and 8. 
 V. Step forward on right foot, 1. Slide left foot up behind, right in 
 fifth position and bend knees, 2. Step back on left foot. 3. Point 
 right foot in fourth position in front, 4. 
 
122 
 
 VI. Repeat V, to left. 
 
 VH. Beginning with the outer foot (partners facing each other), slide 
 forward with the outer foot, 1. Slide inner foot up to outer 
 foot, 2. Step forward on outer foot, 3. Hop on outer foot, 
 having inner foot slightly bent and the point slightly raised in 
 rear, 4. 
 
 VHI, Repeat VH, beginning with inner foot (partners back to back), shde 
 inner foot forward, 1. Slide outer foot up to inner foot, 2. 
 Step forward on inner foot, 3. Hop on inner foot- with outside 
 leg slightly bent and point slightly raised in rear, 4. 
 IX. Repeat VII. 
 X. -Repeat VIII. 
 
 Repeat from beginning. 
 
 See List of Folk and Aesthetic Dances, on page 25. 
 
 COURSE IN PHYSICAL TRAINING FOR HIGH SCHOOL BOYS. 
 
 From the formal Swedish gymnastics in the class room we change to a 
 complete course in Physical Training in a well-equipped gymnasium. 
 
 The required work arranged into a two years' course of two terms each 
 and taken twice weekly in forty-minute periods. The instructor is left to grade 
 the work according to the ability of his class. 
 
 First Year. 
 First Period. 
 
 Running — simple. 
 
 Tactics — for the individual. (Follow Schrader's "The Teaching of Tactics.") 
 
 Calisthenics : - 
 
 \. Wands. 
 
 2. Clubs. 
 
 3. Dumb-bells. 
 
 Athletics: 
 
 L 
 
 Jumping. 
 
 a. Broad. 
 
 b. High. 
 
 c. Hop, step 
 
 and jump.' 
 
 2. 
 
 Relay racing. 
 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 
 Tactics — for the rank. 
 Apparatus — Elementary- 
 
 -always for 
 
 L 
 2. 
 3. 
 4. 
 5. 
 6. 
 7. 
 3. 
 9. 
 10. 
 
 Rmgs. 
 
 Climbing poles 
 Ladders. 
 Circle swing. 
 Horizontal bar. 
 Buck. 
 Horse. 
 Parallel bar. 
 Stall bars. 
 Chest weights. 
 
 and ropes. 
 
 Games. 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 L 
 2. 
 
 Gymix^stic. 
 
 
123 
 
 Second Year. 
 First Period. 
 
 Running — in figures. 
 
 Tactics. 
 
 1. Formation from a front line or front column of fours. 
 
 2. From a flank line or flank column of fours. 
 
 3. Evolution of the ranks as units. 
 
 Calisthenics. 
 
 Athletics and elementary tumbling. 
 
 Second Period. 
 
 Tactics — same as in the first period. 
 Apparatus — graded by the instructor. 
 Recreative exercises. 
 
 1. Games. 
 
 a. Team. 
 
 b. Gymnastic. 
 
 2. Gymnastic dancing. 
 
 Highland Fling, Sailors' Hornpipe, Sword Dance, etc. 
 
 SUPPLEMENTARY. 
 
 To provide after school exercises and recreation for pupils in the public 
 schools of a more extended and in some cases more vigorous form than can be 
 given during the school program to the large number that have to be accommo- 
 dated in a small space, the following list of Athletic Efficiency Tests will be 
 offered under the direct supervision of the physical director : 
 
 1. Standing broad jump. 11. Basket ball far throw. 
 
 2. Chinning the bar. 12. Playground stunts. 
 
 3. Goal shooting. 13. Combination dip. 
 
 4. Standing high jump. 14. Trunk hfting. 
 
 5. Rope climbing. 15. Dashes. 
 
 6. Push ups. 16. Relay races. 
 
 7. Standing hop, step and jump. 17. Running broad jump. 
 
 8. Shot put. 18. Walking. 
 
 9. Running high jump. 19. Folk dancing for the girls. 
 10. Potato race. 20. Organized games. 
 
 Opportunity will be given to both boys and girls for Individual and Class 
 Competitions subject to the regulations of the physical director. 
 
 All Athletic Competitions of the public schools are under the supervision 
 of the physical director. 
 
 See the Official Hand Book of the Public School's Athletic League. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Page 
 
 Breathing Exercises 49 
 
 Class Room Tactics 18 
 
 Preliminary Commands and Explanations 18 
 
 Lesson 1. Mark time— Mark ! 18 
 
 Lesson 2. (a) March forward and halt 19 
 
 (b) March backward and halt 19 
 
 Lesson 3. March forward and backward 19 
 
 Lesson 4. (a) Slow march 19 
 
 (b) Change from normal to slow march 19 
 
 Lesson 5. (a) Left (right) about — Face 19 
 
 (b) Left (right) about— Halt ! 19 
 
 Lesson 6. Change from Forward to Backward, and from Forward 
 
 to Left (right) about— Face ! 19 
 
 Lesson 7. Class-about — March ! 19 
 
 Lesson 8. (a) To the left flank— Halt ! 19 
 
 (b) To the right flank— Halt ! 19 
 
 Lesson 9. (a) Right-face and forward — March ! 19 
 
 (b) Left-face and forward — March! 19 
 
 Lesson 10. Column to the Left by one — March ! 20 
 
 Dress— right ! (or left !) 20 
 
 Forward — dress ! 20 
 
 Course of Physical Training for High School Boys 122 
 
 Course of Physical Training for High School Girls 103 
 
 Outline for each lesson , . . . 103 
 
 Mass Free Exercises 104 
 
 Wand Exercises . . . ,. 106 
 
 Dumb-Bell Exercises 108 
 
 Track and Field Work 109 
 
 Apparatus Work Ill 
 
 Horse Ill 
 
 Parallel Bars Ill 
 
 Buck 112 
 
 Rings 112 
 
 Rope and Pole 112 
 
 Balance Boards 113 
 
 Circle Swing or Giant Stride 113 
 
 Team Games . . . . 113 
 
 Outline for the Artistic Execution of Fancy Steps 114 
 
 Folk and Aesthetic Dances 25 
 
 Explanation of Technical Terms .* 27 
 
 Facings 18 
 
 1. Left— Face ! 18 
 
 2. Right— Face ! , 18 
 
 3. Half-left (or right)— Face ! 18 
 
 4. Left (or right)-about — Face ! 18 
 
 Games : 50 
 
 Grade 1 65 
 
 Grade H 69 
 
 Grade III IZ 
 
 Grade IV 78 
 
126 
 
 Page 
 
 Grade V 83 
 
 Grade VI 88 
 
 Grade VII 93 
 
 Grade VIII 98 
 
 Graded List of Folk and Aesthetic Dances 25 
 
 Gymnastic Action Story : A Gilliwee Picnic. 63 
 
 Gymnastic Days' Order and Progression 49 
 
 Imaginary Plays 51 
 
 1. Snowing . 51 
 
 2. Shoveling Snow 51 
 
 3. Throw Snow Balls... ^.. 51 
 
 4. Warm the Hands and Feet 51 
 
 5. Warm the Body 51 
 
 6. Pick Apples 51 
 
 7. Climb Rope 51 
 
 8. Shoot with Bow and Arrow 51 
 
 9. Throw the Lasso and Pull In 51 
 
 10. Pitch and Bat a Ball 51 
 
 11. Saw Wood 52 
 
 12. Splitting Wood 52 
 
 13. Play Golf 52 
 
 14. ' Swimming 52 
 
 15. Shot Put 52 
 
 Running and Jumping 52 
 
 Follow My Leader 52 
 
 Book on Head . . . j 52 
 
 Birds Fly 52 
 
 Trees in a Storm 52 
 
 Instructions to the Teachers 5 
 
 I. Time 5 
 
 II. Ventilation and Temperature 5 
 
 III. Perfect Stillness of Person 5 
 
 IV. Uniformity of Motion , 5 
 
 V. Manner of Execution 5 
 
 VI. Commands 6 
 
 VII. Thoroughness 6 
 
 VIII. Music 6 
 
 IX. Positions 7 
 
 X. Posture and the Posture Drill 7 
 
 XL Posture Outline folder 
 
 Introduction 3 
 
 Movements of the Arms 15 
 
 1. Arms-forward — Stretch ! 15 
 
 2. Arms-forward and upward — Fling ! 15 
 
 3. Arms-sideward and upward — Fling ! 15 
 
 4. Arms-sideward — Fling ! (From : Arms-forward — Bend !. 15 
 
 5. Arms-sideward^Fling ! . . . . 15 
 
 6. Arms — Circling ! 15 
 
 7. Arm— Rotation ! 15 
 
 Movements of the Head *. : . .- 12 
 
 1. Head-forward — Bend ! 12 
 
 2. Head-backward — Bend ! . . . . | 12 
 
 3. Head to left (or right)— Bend ! 12 
 
 ,4. Head to left (or right)— Twist ! 12 
 
 ; 5. Head — Circling! Td 
 
 6. Head— Rotation ! 13 
 
 Movements of the Legs .....,.'..'........... 15 
 
 1. Heels— Raise! 15 
 
127 
 
 Page 
 
 2. Toes — Raise ! 15 
 
 3. Alternate-toes — Raise ! 16 
 
 4. Knees— Bend ! 16 
 
 5. Touchstep-left forward — Place ! 17 
 
 6. Left (or right) leg-forward — Raise ! 17 
 
 7. Left (or right) knee-upward — Bend ! 17 
 
 8. Leg-forward or backward — Stretch ! 17 
 
 9. Foot — Circling ! 17 
 
 10. Leg— Rotation ! 17 
 
 11. In place — Jump ! 17 
 
 12. Turning to left (or right) -in place— Jump ! 17 
 
 13. From place-forward — Jump ! 17 
 
 14. From place-backward — Jump ! 17 
 
 15. One step-forward — Jump ! 17 
 
 16. Stride— Jump ! 18 
 
 Movements of the Trunk 13 
 
 1. Trunk-forward — Bend ! 13 
 
 2. Trunk-backward — Bend ! 14 
 
 3. Trunk-to left (or right)— Bend ! 14 
 
 4. Trunk-to left (or right) — :Twist ! 14 
 
 5. Trunk — Circling ! * . . 15 
 
 Out-of-Door Games 53 
 
 Touch 53 
 
 Cat and Mouse 53 
 
 Flank Tag 53 
 
 Link Tag 53 
 
 Dodge Ball .• 54 
 
 Double Dodge Ball 54 
 
 Captain Dodge Ball 54 
 
 Run Dodge Ball 55 
 
 Base Dodge Ball 55 
 
 End Ball 56 
 
 Corner Ball 57 
 
 Captain Ball .' 58 
 
 Relay Races 58 
 
 Shuttle Relay 58 
 
 Potato Relay 59 
 
 Bound Ball Relay 59 
 
 Snake Relay 59 
 
 Lame Fox 59 
 
 Straddle Ball or Pass Ball 59 
 
 Pin Ball 59 
 
 Ling or German Ball 60 
 
 Snatch the Kerchief 60 
 
 Basket Ball Race 60 
 
 Wrestling Circle or Poison 61 
 
 Jolly Fisherman 61 
 
 Driving the Pig 61 
 
 Pin Guard of Club Circle 61 
 
 Bombardment of Club Game 61 
 
 . Duck on the Rock ' 62 
 
 Medicine Ball Races .'V. .J. 62 
 
 Japanese. Tag ; i «X' i >. . V 63 
 
 Three Deep . .'. 63 
 
 Circle Ball ' 63 
 
 List of other good games . ' 63 
 
 Play Exercises and School Room Games 50 
 
 Bean Bag games, 1 to 7 50 
 
128 
 
 Page 
 
 Principal Starting Positions of the Arms 11 
 
 1. Hips— Firm ! 11 
 
 2. Neck— Firm ! U 
 
 3. Arms-upward — Bend ! 11 
 
 4. Arms-forward — Bend ! , . 11 
 
 5. Arms-sideward — Bend ! 11 
 
 6. xA.rms-half forward — Bend ! 11 
 
 7. Arms-half sideward — Bend ! 11 
 
 8. Arms-sideward — Raise ! 11 
 
 9. Arms-forward — Raise ! 11 
 
 10. Arms-upward — Raise ! . . 11 
 
 Principal Starting Positions of the Feet and Legs 11 
 
 1. Feet— Close ! . . .» 11 
 
 2. Feet-sideward — Place ! 12 
 
 3. Left (or right) foot-forward — Place ! 12 
 
 4. Left (or right) foot-outward — Place ! 12 
 
 5. Left "(or right) -out ward— Fall out ! 12 
 
 6. Left (or right)-forward — Fall out ! 12 
 
 7. Left (or right)-sideward — Fall out ! 12 
 
 8. Left (or right) -backward— Fall out ! 12 
 
 9. Left (or right) -outward-backward — Fall out ! 12 
 
 10. Sit on Desk— Place ! 12 
 
 11. Number twos ready to — Support ! : 12 
 
 Rhythmical Steps 21 
 
 Lesson 1. Place left foot in front of the right, etc 21 
 
 Lesson 2. March around the room on tiptoes, etc 21 
 
 Lesson . 3. Place left foot forward, extending the instep, etc 21 
 
 Lesson 4. Place left foot forward, then immediately bring the toes, 
 
 etc 21 
 
 Lesson 5. Place left foot forward, and at same time, etc 21 
 
 Lesson 6. Pupils, turned sideward, step out sideward with kft foot, etc. 21 
 
 Lesson 7. March around the room with chest out, etc. 22 
 
 Lesson 8. Change Hop, with one hop 22 
 
 Lesson 9. Change Hop, with two hops 22 
 
 Lesson 10. Skip, hop around the room 22 
 
 Lesson 11. Follow Step 22 
 
 Lesson 12. Change Step 22 
 
 Lesson 13. Change Step sideward with turning 22 
 
 Lesson 14. Galop Step 22 
 
 Lesson 15. Polka Step 23 
 
 Lesson 16. Change Hop with arms circling. 23 
 
 Lesson 17. Touch Step 23 
 
 Lesson 18. Double Touch Step 23 
 
 Lesson 19. Double Touch and Polka Step 23 
 
 Lesson 20. Cross Balance Step 23 
 
 Lesson 21. Change Step : with two extra hops, etc 24 
 
 Rising Exercise, Grades 1, 2 and 3 49 
 
 Rising Exercise, Grades 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 50 
 
 Routine for Beginning and Closing the Lesson 49 
 
 Supplementary .' 123 
 
 Value of Play '.,. 50